JP6507993B2 - Pachinko gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  It is about a pachinko game machine.

  The pachinko game machine that is most widely spread at present is called "special symbol" (or main game symbol) on the display unit such as 7-segment when the game ball enters the start opening (start chucker). Symbol is variably displayed, and when the special symbol is in a specific mode (for example, “7”), the special gaming state in which the player has a higher profit state than the normal gaming state {the special winning opening in the closed state at the normal time It is a model of a type (so-called "first-class pachinko gaming machine") that shifts to a game of contents opened by a predetermined condition (a so-called attacker). Here, in order to reduce the burden of display control of the special symbol directly linked to the player's profit, it is called "decorative symbol" for effect to enhance the interest of the game separately from the "special symbol" described above. The symbol to be displayed is displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal having a size larger than that of the display unit in synchronization with the variation of the special symbol. Then, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the decorative symbol also begins to change accordingly, and when the special symbol is stopped in a specific mode (for example, "7"), the decorative symbol is also according to this, a predetermined mode (for example, It will stop at "777". Then, the player recognizes that the transition to the special game is determined by the decorative symbol being stopped in a predetermined manner.

  Here, since the mechanism is common to this type of pachinko gaming machine, how to devise a high level of interest with regard to overall production including the variation pattern of the above-mentioned pattern, in order to differentiate from other types. It is focused on whether to grant. For example, in the situation where the variable display of "special symbol" can not be started, it has a function to hold the variable display with the game ball entering the start opening as a trigger, and executes the effect according to the hold display. One of the methods is to improve the interest of the game by configuring it to obtain.

JP, 2009-136435, A JP 2014-150802 JP 2014-150882 JP 2014-213021 JP 2014-233439 JP 2015-77173

  However, since there are many such gaming machines in the past, there is a problem that development of a model that can realize further innovative game characteristics is desired.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect is
The starting opening where the game ball can enter, and
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information;
A main gaming unit that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit capable of displaying an effect;
And an auxiliary game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit;
The main game club is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on entry into the starting opening;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired random number until the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied when the random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, and for holding to occur;
If the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, a yes / no decision is performed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information is changed in the identification information display unit based on the result of the yes / no decision Identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the identification information after the display;
Special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group;
Game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit to the secondary gaming unit side,
The secondary gaming unit is
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game unit side;
The effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
It is possible to display a fluctuation right image which is an image object that is newly displayed in response to the occurrence of a new hold and shifted and displayed in response to satisfaction of the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information on the effect display unit There are a plurality of display modes as the display mode of the variable right image, and the type of the display mode in the certain variable right image can be changed during the period when the certain variable right image is displayed. ,
In the case where there is a pre-hold that will satisfy the variable display start condition of the identification information prior to a certain hold and the certain hold, the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the pre-held reserve is satisfied During the variable display of the identification information at the time of the event, it is possible to carry out a pre-reading effect for announcing the expected degree of future special game execution due to the certain hold,
The expectation of changing the type of the display mode in the variable right image corresponding to the certain hold is the pre-reading effect in the variable display of the identification information when the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the pre-hold is satisfied It is configured to be different depending on the execution content of the presence / absence of execution and / or the pre-reading effect,
When the pre-reading effect due to the certain holding is being executed, the execution frequency of the operation effect whose operation expectation of the special game is suggested by the operation of the operating device of the player is the fluctuation of the identification information regarding the certain holding The variation display of the identification information when the display start condition is satisfied is configured to be higher than the variation display of the identification information when the change display start condition of the identification information related to the preemptive suspension is satisfied,
It has a plurality of types of effect modes as the operation effect, and is configured to have different expectations for the execution of special games depending on which type of effect mode is executed as the operation effect.
As a display mode of background display displayed in the effect display unit, at least a display mode A and a display mode B having a higher expectation of execution of a special game than the display mode A,
In the display mode A, the background display is displayed in the display mode A for the variable right image corresponding to the suspension not satisfying the variable display start condition of the identification information displayed when the background display is displayed in the display mode B than the variation right image corresponding to the hold that does not meet the varying display start condition identification information that is displayed when it is being configured probability that the type of display mode is changed is increased,
When changing the type of display mode in a certain change right image, the display change effect which is an effect of suggesting or notifying that the kind of display mode in the certain change right image is to be changed is executed, The type of display mode in the variable right image can be changed.
About the fluctuation display of the identification information performed corresponding to having satisfied the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information under the situation where the number of reservations when the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied is the first holding number The fluctuation display time is configured to be the fluctuation display time A,
In a situation where the number of reservations when the variable information display start condition of the identification information is satisfied is the second number of reservations less than the first number of reservations, in response to satisfying the condition of the variable information display start of the identification information The fluctuation display time for fluctuation display of identification information to be performed is configured to be the fluctuation display time B which is longer than the fluctuation display time A,
Under the condition that the number of reservations when the variable information display start condition of the identification information is satisfied is the first number of reservations, the variable display time A performed corresponding to satisfying the condition of the variable image display start of the identification information During the variable display of the identification information, it is possible to execute a display change effect of a certain type of display mode for the variable right image displayed corresponding to the remaining hold,
Under the condition that the number of reservations when the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied is the second number of reservations, the variation display time B performed in response to satisfying the condition of the variation display start of the identification information During the variable display of the identification information, even if a new hold occurs when the remaining variable display time of the variable display of the identification information is equal to or longer than the variable display time A, it is displayed corresponding to the new hold Although the display change effect of the certain type of display mode is not executed for the variable right image, the variable right image displayed in response to the new hold triggered by satisfying the next variable display start condition of the identification information The pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention is configured to be able to change the type of display mode in the above.
<Supplementary Note>
In addition, although listed about another aspect different from this aspect below, it is possible to implement without being limited to these at all.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect is
A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10),
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g);
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A for acquiring a random number based on entering a ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied The random number temporary storage means (for example, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B) which temporarily stores the acquired random numbers and controls the holding to occur.
If the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, a yes / no judgment is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbols) for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after changing the identification information in the game symbol display portion A21g and the second main game symbol display portion B21g) Control means MP11-C),
Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing special games advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group;
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming part (for example, the secondary control board S) Equipped with MT)
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving the game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side,
Effect display content control means (e.g., for example, control effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (e.g., information transmission / reception control means SM40) , Effect display control means SM20),
An effect display unit (for example, effect display) is a fluctuation right image that is an image object that is newly displayed triggered by the occurrence of a new hold and shifted and displayed upon satisfaction of the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information It is possible to display on the device SG), and has a plurality of display modes as a display mode of the variable right image, and a type of display mode in the certain variable right image during a period when a certain variable right image is displayed Is configured to be changeable,
It is possible to display the fluctuation right image corresponding to the suspension not satisfying the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information, and correspond to the fluctuation display of the identification information performed when the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. It is configured to be able to display the variable right image,
During a period in which a certain variable right image is displayed, an accompanying image, which is an image attached to the certain variable right image, can be displayed,
During a period in which a certain fluctuation right image is displayed, it is configured to be able to execute cooperation effect which is an effect of making the certain fluctuation right image cooperate with a predetermined advance notice effect,
During a period in which a certain variable right image is displayed, the type of display mode in the certain variable right image is changed or an incidental to the certain variable right image, triggered by the execution of the cooperative effect. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being able to display an accompanying image.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present aspect, it is possible to realize further novel gaming characteristics in a gaming machine adopting the concept of creating a gaming progress state advantageous to the player.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is an overall electrical block diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the motorized product drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of main gaming symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of limited frequency A fluctuation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of limited frequency B fluctuation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the small hitting game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a main flow chart on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the on-hold information management process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flow chart of first main game winning combination prefetching determination processing on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the second main game winning combination prefetching determination process on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of pre-reading pending content determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the pending content transmission process on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the process of transmitting a process of holding the contents at the time of digestion on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 30 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the variation suggestion display mode management process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display control process on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is a main flowchart of the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of hold simultaneous change management processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of hold information management processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flow chart of first main game winning combination prefetching determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of giant hold prefetching determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of skewer holding pre-reading determination processing on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flow chart of the hold allocation pre-reading determination process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flow chart of the first main game pre-reading reserve content determining process on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of pre-reading effect contents determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the variation suggestion display mode management process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display control process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 47 is an illustration of simultaneous holding change effect execution on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 48 is an illustration of a pre-reading effect execution image on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of a process of determining a variation fixed time on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 52 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 53 is a limited frequency table on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of special game operation condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 57 is a main flowchart of the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of second main game winning combination prefetching determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of a pending content transmission process on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of a process of transmitting a process of holding pending content at the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 62 is a flowchart of initialization command transmission determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 63 is a flow chart of first main game winning combination prefetching determination processing on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 64 shows a modification example 1 of the pre-play holding effect on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 65 shows a modification example 2 of the pre-play holding effect on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 66 shows a modification example 3 of the pre-play holding effect on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 67 shows a modification example 4 of the pre-play holding effect on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 68 shows a modification example 5 of the pre-play holding effect on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 69 shows a modification example 6 of the reserve prefetching effect on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 70 shows a modification example 7 of the play ahead read effect on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 71 shows a modification example 8 of the pre-play holding effect on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 72 shows a modification example 9 of the reserve prefetching rendering effect on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 73 shows a modification example 10 of the reserve prefetching presentation effect change on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 74 shows a modification example 11 of the pre-play holding effect on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 75 shows a modification example 12 of the reserve prefetching effect on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 76 shows a modification example 13 of the reserve prefetching effect on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 77 shows a modification example 14 of the pre-play holding effect on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 78 shows a modification example 15 of the reserve prefetching effect on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 79 shows a modification example 16 of the pre-play holding effect on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 80 shows a modification example 17 of the pre-play holding effect on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 81 shows a modification example 18 of the pre-play holding effect on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 82 shows a modification 19 of the pre-play holding effect on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 83 shows a modification 20 of the reserve prefetching rendering effect on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

Form to carry out

  First, the meaning of each term in the present specification will be described. The term "entry" includes not only winnings where the winning balls are paid out, but also passing to "through chuckers" where there is no winning balls paid out. The "opened state, open state" and "closed state, closed state" are, for example, open state = easy-to-win state and closed state = no prize in the configuration of a general large winning opening (so-called, attacker). It will be easy. Also, for example, a state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an advanced state) projected from the game board (the player side) and a state (hereinafter referred to as the retracted state) retracted into the game board (opposite to the player side) In a configuration (so-called Vero type attacker) capable of taking the above condition, the advancing state = the winning easy state, and the retreating state = the winning non-easiness state. The "random number" is a random number used in a lottery (lottery by an electronic computer) for determining some game content in a pachinko gaming machine, and includes pseudo random numbers in addition to narrow random numbers (for example, hard as random numbers Random number, soft random number as pseudo random number). For example, the so-called "basic random number" affecting the outcome of the game, specifically, "winning random number (random number for winning lottery)" associated with the transition of the special game, the variation pattern (or variation time) of the identification symbol is determined "Variation mode decision random number" for doing, "symbol decision random number" which decides stop pattern, and "per hit symbol decision random number" which decides whether or not to shift to specific game (for example probability fluctuation game) after special game be able to. When determining the content of the variation mode or the content of the fixed identification information, it is not necessary to use all these random numbers, and at least one random number which is the same as or different from each other may be used. In addition, in this specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers, but once in the entrance (for example, starting entrance) which is a trigger for acquiring random numbers. The random number acquired by entering the ball is referred to as one (ie, in the above example, a bundle of random numbers such as a winning random number + a variation mode determination random number + a symbol determination random number ... is referred to as a single random number) . Also, for example, one type of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also be another type of random number (for example, a symbol determination random number). The “gaming state” is, for example, a special gaming state in which the special winning opening can be opened, a transition to the special gaming state, a transition to the special gaming state from a non-probability fluctuation gaming state where the lottery probability is a predetermined value. Transition game state with high lottery probability, transition to special game Auxiliary game state with assistance for winning to start slot that becomes transition lottery to special game (so-called, normal symbol time reduction state, for example, variable members are attached to the start slot In the case, the open period of the variable member is long, the open winning probability of the variable member is high, the notification time of the result of the open lottery of the variable member is short, and so on. "The average value is uniform regardless of the number of reservations" means that the fluctuation time is selected without depending on the number of reservations, but as other prescribed contents, for example, it relates to (1) loss In the stop design "HA", the first difference appears in the average of the fluctuation time average value with the number of reservations a and the average value of the fluctuation time with the number of reservations b which is the number of reservations larger than the number of reservations a In the pattern "HB", there is no difference between the average of the fluctuation time in the number of reservations a and the average of the fluctuation time in the number of reservations b, or the second difference is more than the first difference, and the second (2) is assigned to all variation modes that can be selected at the time of the stop symbol “HA” related to the loss at the number of reservations c (for example, four numbers of reservations), which is smaller than the first difference. Random number range assigned to the most easily selected variation mode in random number range The occupancy rate is the occupancy rate α, and it is the easiest to be selected in the random number range assigned to all the variation modes that can be selected at the stop symbol “HB” related to the loss with the number of reservations c (for example, 4) Assuming that the ratio occupied by the random number range allocated for the variation mode is the occupancy rate β, the occupancy rate α is higher than the occupancy rate β (that is, the most easily selected variation modes are concentrated and selected Easy) value.

  The following embodiment is a model in which two conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machines are mixed (type 1 first type compound machine). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is within the scope when applied to other gaming machines (eg, conventional pachinko gaming machines such as conventional type 1, type 2, type 3 and general electronic combination). . Note that the present embodiment is merely an example, and relates to the order of each step regarding various processes such as the location and function of each means, the on / off timing of the flag, and the means name etc. It is not limited to the following aspects. In addition, the embodiments and modifications described above should not be construed as limiting as applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification of one embodiment is a modification of another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are independently described, It should be understood that a combination of the modification and the other modification is also described. Further, in the present embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table regarding various tables, but these are not limited, and the lottery table may be a reference table or vice versa.

(This embodiment)
Here, before describing each component, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Pachinko gaming machines are mainly composed of gaming machine slots and gaming boards. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

  First, the gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper bowl D20, a lower bowl D22, and a firing handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame for fixing the pachinko gaming machine at a position where it should be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame aligned with the opening of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 so as to be able to open and close via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for firing a game ball, a mechanism for detachably accommodating a game board, a mechanism for guiding or recovering the game ball, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is formed of glass or the like and is supported by the door D18. The door D18 is openably and closably attached to the front frame D14 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball dish D20 has a mechanism for storing game balls, sending out the game balls to the launch rail, and removing the game balls from the lower ball dish D22. The lower ball tray D22 has a mechanism for storing and removing game balls. In addition, speakers D24 are provided on the upper left and right sides of the gaming machine, and sound effects are output according to the gaming state and the like.

  Next, in the game board, a game area D30 partitioned by the outer rail D32 and the inner rail D34 is formed. Then, in the game area D30, in addition to a plurality of mechanisms such as a plurality of game nails and windmills not shown and various general winning openings, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10, an auxiliary game start opening H10, 1st large winning opening C10, 2nd large winning opening C20, 1st main game symbol display device A20, 2nd main game symbol display device B20, effect display device SG, auxiliary game symbol display device H20, center decoration D38 and out mouth D36 is installed. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail in order.

  Next, the first main game start port A10 is installed as a start winning port corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start port A10 is provided with a first main game start port entering ball detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start slot entrance ball detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball to the first main game start slot A10, and the first main game start indicating the entrance ball at the time of entry Generate ball entry information.

  Next, the second main game start port B10 is installed as a start winning port corresponding to the second main game. As a specific configuration, the second main game start port B10 includes a second main game start port ball detection device B11s and a second main game start port electric role object B11d. Here, the second main game start slot entrance ball detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball to the second main game start slot B10, and indicates the second main game start indicating the entrance ball at the time of entry. Generate ball entry information. Next, the second main game start port electric role B11d changes into a closed state in which the game ball is less likely to win in the second main game start port B10 and an open state in which the game ball is easier to win than the normal state.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first main game start opening A10 and the second main game start opening B10 are arranged to overlap, and the presence of the first main game start opening A10 makes the second main game start. The upper part of the game start port B10 is closed. In addition, both the game ball flowing down the left side (based on the center of the game area) of the game area D30 and the game ball flowing down the right side (based on the center of the game area D30) are the first main game start opening A10. And it is comprised so that it may be induced | guided | derived to 2nd main game starting opening B10.

  In the present embodiment, although the electric bonus is provided on the second main game start opening B10 side, the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric bonus is provided on the first main game start opening A10 side. May be Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first main game start opening A10 and the second main game start opening B10 are disposed to overlap vertically, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the first main game start opening You may be comprised so that A10 and 2nd main game starting opening B10 may be spaced apart and arrange | positioned. In such a configuration, a member that blocks the upper portion of the second main game start opening electric combination B11 d may be provided. Also, while the game ball flowing down the left side (based on the middle of the game area) of the game area D30 is easily guided to the first main game start port A10, it is difficult to be guided to the second main game start port B10, and the game area D30 is The game ball flowing down the right side (based on the middle of the game area) may be configured to be easily guided to the second main game start opening B10 while being hard to be guided to the first main game start opening A10. In addition, "it is easy to be induced" and "it is hard to be induced" are determined by the size of the number of balls when 10000 balls are respectively emitted to the right and left sides of the game ball, for example.

  Next, the auxiliary game start port H10 includes the auxiliary game start port entrance detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start slot entrance detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball to the auxiliary game start slot H10, and generates the auxiliary game start slot entrance information indicating the ball entry when entering the ball. Do. It should be noted that the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port H10 is a trigger for a lottery for expanding the second main game start port electric winning combination B11d of the second main game start port B10.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the game ball that flows down the right side (the center of the game area) of the game area D30 is easily induced in the auxiliary game start port H10, and the game ball that flows down the left side of the game area D30 is Although it is configured to be hard to be induced {but not limited to this, the configuration is such that gaming balls flowing down the left side (based on the middle of the gaming region) of the gaming region D30 are easily guided to the auxiliary gaming start port H10 (For example, the auxiliary game start port H10 may be provided on the left and right sides of the game area D30)}.

  Next, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20 are disposed in the upper right of the out port D36 so as to overlap with each other, and flow down the right side (based on the center of the gaming area) of the gaming area D30. The game ball is configured to easily pass through the area where the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20 are arranged before reaching the out slot D36.

  Next, the first large winning opening C10 forms a horizontal rectangular shape that opens when the first main gaming symbol (special symbol) or the second main gaming symbol (special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol. A winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located on the upper right of the out opening D36 and below the second large winning opening C20. Specifically, the first large winning opening C10 is a first large winning opening winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of the game ball, and the first large winning opening electric combination C11d (and the first large winning). And a mouth solenoid C13). Here, the first large winning opening winning combination detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entering of the gaming ball to the first large winning opening C10, and the first large winning opening entering ball information indicating the entering at the time of entering the ball Generate The first big winning opening electric winning combination C11d changes the first big winning opening C10 to the first big winning opening C10 in the normal state where the gaming ball can not win or difficult to win and the opening state where the gaming ball is easy to win (first (1) The large winning opening solenoid C13 is excited and varied). In the present embodiment, the form of the big winning opening is changed to a horizontal rectangular shape and the gaming ball can not be won or difficult to win in a normal state and an open state in which the gaming ball can easily win. It is not limited to In that case, for example, a mode capable of taking an advanced state in which the rod-like member provided in the big winning opening protrudes to the player side and a retracted state in which the bar member is retracted to the player side (so-called (Velo type attacker), which is preferable when it is desired to secure that the number of balls entering the big winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the second large winning opening C20 forms a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main gaming symbol (special symbol) or the second main gaming symbol (special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol. A winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located on the upper right of the opening D36 and above the first big winning opening C10. As a specific configuration, the second large winning opening C20, the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of the game ball, and the second large winning opening electric combination C21d (and the second large winning And a mouth solenoid C23). Here, the second large winning opening winning combination detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entering of the gaming ball to the second large winning opening C20, the second large winning opening entering ball information showing the entering at the time of entering the ball Generate The gaming ball having entered the second large winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s. Next, the second big winning opening electric winning combination C21d, in the second big winning opening C20 the game ball can not be winning or difficult to win the normal state and the opening state where the gaming ball is easy to win the second big winning opening C20 Make it variable. In the present embodiment, the form of the big winning opening is changed to a horizontal rectangular shape and the gaming ball can not be won or difficult to win in a normal state and an open state in which the gaming ball can easily win. It is not limited to In that case, for example, a mode capable of taking an advanced state in which the rod-like member provided in the big winning opening protrudes to the player side and a retracted state in which the bar member is retracted to the player side (so-called (Velo type attacker), which is preferable when it is desired to secure that the number of balls entering the big winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (the second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (the second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (the second main game) Is an apparatus that executes the displayed information. Specifically, the first main game symbol display device A20 (the second main game symbol display device B20), the first main game symbol display portion A21g (the second main game symbol display portion B21g), and the first main game And a symbol hold display unit A21 h (a second main game symbol hold display unit B21 h). Here, the first main game symbol holding display area A21h (the second main game symbol holding display area B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps is the first main game (second main game) Corresponds to the number of pending random numbers (the number of fluctuations of the main game symbol not being executed). In addition, 1st main game symbol display part A21g (2nd main game symbol display part B21g) is comprised by 7 segment LED, for example, and 1st main game symbol (2nd main game symbol) is "0"-"9. "10" numbers displayed with "" and lost "-" {However, not limited to this, 7-segment LED is used to make it difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed It is preferable to use and display by a symbol or the like. In addition, the number of reservations is not limited to four lamps, and the maximum number of reservations can be displayed (for example, one lamp can be displayed. Number 1: lighted, pending number 2: low-speed blinking, pending number 3: medium-speed blinking, pending number 4: high-speed blinking, if configured).

  In the present embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (the second main game symbol display device B20), because the first main game symbol (the second main game symbol) does not have to have a dramatic role. The size of is set so as not to be noticeable. However, when adopting a method in which the first main game symbol (the second main game symbol) itself has an effective role and the first decorative symbol (the second decorative symbol) is not displayed, the effect to be described later The first main game symbol (second main game symbol) may be displayed on a liquid crystal display such as the display device SG.

  Next, the effect display device SG is a device that executes display or the like of an effect image including a decorative symbol that fluctuates / stops in conjunction with the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which the effect is executed including the change display of the decorative symbol and the like. Here, the display area SG10 is a first hold display unit SG12 (and a second hold display unit SG13) for displaying main game hold information, and a moving image of a decorative symbol variation of a plurality of rows imitating, for example, a slot machine game. And a decorative symbol display area SG11 for displaying the In the present embodiment, the effect display device SG is configured by a liquid crystal display, but may be configured by other display means such as a mechanical drum or an LED. Next, the first hold display unit SG12 (and the second hold display unit SG13) is composed of four lamps, which are linked to the hold lamp of the main game symbol.

  Next, the auxiliary gaming symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display and the like regarding the auxiliary gaming symbol. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display portion H21h. Here, the auxiliary gaming symbol holding display unit H21 h is configured of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps corresponds to the number of holdings of the auxiliary gaming symbol fluctuation (the number of auxiliary gaming symbol fluctuation not being executed).

  Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as a channel of the game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. In addition, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in an area other than the game area D30 or the game area D30, and plays an effect by blinking or the like.

  Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko game machine controls the entire operation of the pachinko game machine, and in particular, controls the entire game operation such as lottery when entering the first main game start port A10 (second main game start port B10) (ie, the game Control board M that performs control directly related to the benefit of the person and effect control means (sub main control unit) that performs display control and the like related to various effects on the effect display device SG that adds interest to the game content SM, sub-sub control unit SS that mainly performs effect display, prize ball tank KT, prize ball rail KR, and game balls supplied from the prize ball tank KT according to the winning on each winning hole D20 A prize ball payout device (set base) KE provided with a payout unit KE10 or the like, a prize ball payout control board KH for controlling the payout operation by the payout unit KE10, and a game ball (storage ball) of the upper bowl D20 To area D30 Launch device D42 that launches each ball, launch control board D40 that controls the launch operation of launcher D42, power supply unit E that supplies power to each part of the pachinko game machine, and power on / off pachinko game machine A power switch Ea or the like which is a switch is provided on the back of the front frame D14 (opposite to the game side).

  Next, the electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as described above, the payout of gaming balls is performed based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M to control the award ball payout control board KH to be controlled, various effects on the effect display device SG such as fluctuation / stop of the decorative symbol, sound from the speaker D24, A sub control board S (in this example, the sub main control unit SM and the sub sub control unit SS are disposed on one board) which controls the lighting of the game effect lamp D26 and the execution of an error notification etc. And a power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including the control board. Here, the sub control board S controls various effects on the effect display device SG such as variation and stop of the decorative symbol, sounds from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and an error notification. And two control units of a sub-sub control unit SS that executes display processing such as variation display / stop display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device SG, suspension display, and advance notice display. The main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, the sub main control unit SM, and the sub sub control unit SS include a CPU that performs various arithmetic processing, a ROM that pre-stores a program that defines the arithmetic processing of the CPU, A RAM for temporarily storing data (such as various data generated during a game and a computer program read from a ROM) handled by the computer is mounted. Here, although not particularly illustrated, in the ROM mounted on the main control board M, in order to prevent writing of a program or the like modified due to a fraudulent action, it is configured not to provide an unused area. It is preferable (for example, filling unused areas with all 0's, filling used areas at a young address, etc.). Also, in order to prevent reference to data that is not normally referred to due to noise or fraud, unused data (for example, data used in gaming machines with different specifications or used only for testing at the development stage) It is preferable to configure so as not to provide Similarly, when using the area of the RAM, it is preferable that the area is used by filling the area at a young address and that an unused program area is not provided. The outline configuration of each substrate and the electrical connection between each substrate and device will be outlined below.

  First, the main control board M, the winning opening sensor Ns {the aforementioned first main game start opening ball insertion detection device A11s, the second main game start opening ball insertion detection device B11s, auxiliary game start opening ball insertion detection device H11s, the first 1 large winning opening winning detection device C11s, the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s, a general winning detection device (not shown, but with a general ball entry, there is a winning ball, but not a lottery for entering a symbol) ), Drive solenoids (not shown, such as the first big winning opening solenoid C13, the second big winning opening solenoid C23, etc.), information display LED (not shown), etc. It is electrically connected to the device and controls the progress of the game based on input signals from each input device. Furthermore, the main control board M is also electrically connected to the winning ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub main control unit SM and sub sub control unit SS), and based on the game progress, the prize balls are paid out. The information (commands) relating to etc. is configured to be able to be transmitted to the winning ball payout control board KH, and the information (commands) relating to the presentation / playing state of the game etc to the sub control board S. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like through an external connection terminal (not shown), and the main control board M can be connected by wiring with the hall computer HC through the external connection terminal. Is configured to output game related information to an external device.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as indicated by the arrows in FIG. 3, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to enable two-way communication, while the main control board M and the sub main The control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub main control unit SM (the communication method may use either serial communication or parallel communication). Communication between control boards (between control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

  Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout device KE that executes payout of game balls and a device that can be operated by a player, and receives a request for lending of game balls and receives the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to the game ball lending device R to be transmitted. Further, although not shown, in the present embodiment, the control circuit unit of the launcher is additionally provided in the prize ball payout control board, and the prize ball payout control board and the launcher (launch handle, launch motor, ball feed device) Etc.). In the present embodiment, the game ball lending device R is adopted separately as a form adjacent to the game machine, but may be integrated with the game machine, in which case, it is rented by the prize ball payout control board KH. Control and management control of a recording medium for lending such as electronic money may be integrated.

  Next, the sub control board S is connected to the effect display device SG for displaying a decorative symbol etc. as described above, the speaker D24, the game effect lamp D26, and a drive device (not shown) for other effects. . In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub main control unit SM and the sub sub control unit SS are provided in the sub control substrate S, and the control of sound to be output from the speaker D24 by the sub main control unit SM Lighting control of the lamp D26 and determination control of display contents to be displayed on the effect display device are performed, and display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS Is configured. In the present embodiment, the sub main control unit SM and the sub sub control unit SS are configured to be integrated by the sub control substrate S, but the present invention is not limited to this (configured as a separate substrate Although it may be possible, a merit of being able to reduce the situation where noise mixes in space merit, wiring, etc. arises by being configured to be integrated. Further, the work assignment in both control units can be appropriately changed, for example, the voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable in the case where a voice control circuit is integrated with VDP is adopted). Also, electronic value may be given without giving a physical award ball as a prize ball.

  Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the main control board M is a game peripheral device related to a game (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first and second main game shared peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H), The sub main control unit SM (sub game control means SM) involved in the effect, a prize ball payout control board KH performing payout control of a predetermined number of prize balls based on a payout instruction from the main control board M, and information communicably connected ing. Further, the sub main control unit SM (sub game control means SM) is electrically connected to the sub sub control unit SS (effect display means SS) for executing image effects, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps) and the speakers D24. It is connected. Furthermore, the prize ball payout control substrate KH is electrically connected to a prize ball dispenser KE provided with a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, sub main control unit SM (sub game control means SM), sub sub control unit SS (effect display means SS), prize ball payout control board KH, etc. store data and programs in terms of hardware. And ROM, RAM, and elements such as a CPU used for arithmetic processing. The respective units included in the main control board M below may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means included in a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be configured to be mounted on the main control board M. Hereinafter, the details of each means (apparatus) will be described.

  First, the main control board M is a game information control means MJ for controlling acquisition of game information, a game content determination means MN for determining the contents of the game, and the progress of a game such as a special game or a specific game. Game progress means MP in charge of the current and past gaming state [eg, main gaming related state {normal gaming state, specific gaming state (probability fluctuation gaming state, time shortening gaming state), special gaming state}, status related to auxiliary gaming (Easy open state, non easy open state), stop symbol and fluctuation mode information related to the main game symbol and the auxiliary game symbol, on / off status of various flags, gaming state during special game (for example, round number and winning number information) Game status temporary storage means MB for temporarily storing etc., and various game information {for example, stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information {for example, 16R big hit, 8R big hit, 4 on the gaming peripheral device side Information transmission control means MT (and unsent command is stored to transmit information relating to the big hit, loss}, fluctuation mode (eg, fluctuation time), special game start signal / state information / end signal, hold information etc.) Buffer for command transmission buffer MT10, and a prize ball payout determination means MH for controlling a prize ball payout control board KH to pay out a predetermined prize ball based on the winning of the gaming ball to various winning openings There is.

  Here, the game information control means MJ determines the ball entry determination means MJ 10 for determining the inflow of the game ball to each ball entry port (starting port etc.), and determines whether or not each random number can be acquired. The random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 20 for acquiring the respective random numbers based on the above, and the holding control means MJ 30 for temporarily storing the ball entering each starting opening during the variable display as the holding ball within the upper limit number. doing. In addition, the game progress means MP, directly to the open and close decision of the display control means MP10 for performing control to display the fluctuation and stop display of each symbol, and the second main game start opening electric role object B11d of the second main game start opening B10 The second main game start opening electric role opening and closing control means MP20-B for performing various processing related, special game control means MP30 to control the special game advantageous to the player than the normal game, and the first main With regard to the game and the second main game and the auxiliary game, the first big winning without determination of which game state to shift the current game state, and the transition of the game state (probability fluctuation gaming state, time shortening gaming state) It has small hitting game control means MP40 which manages execution of the small hitting game which can open mouth C10, and specified game control means MP50 for performing processing which changes a game state based on the decision concerned. Each means will be described in detail below.

  First, the ball entry determination means MJ10 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the first main game start slot A10. The first main game start slot entry ball determination means MJ11-A and the second main game start slot The second main game start slot entrance ball determining means MJ11-B to determine whether the game ball has entered the ball B10, and the auxiliary game start slot to determine whether the game ball has flowed into the auxiliary game start slot H10 In the first large winning opening entrance judging means MJ11-C10, and the second large winning opening C20, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first large winning opening C10. It has 2nd big winning a prize entrance ball determination means MJ11-C20 which determines whether a game ball entered a ball.

  Next, the random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 determines whether or not to acquire the first main game side random number based on the entry of the game ball to the first main game start opening A10, and according to the determination result To the first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A which acquires a random number (for example, the first winning random number, the first variation mode determination random number, the first main game symbol determination random number, etc.) and the second main game start opening B10 It is determined whether to acquire the second main game random number based on the entry of the game ball, and the random number (for example, the second winning random number, the second variation mode determination random number, the second main according to the determination result The second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B to acquire the game pattern determination random number etc.), and whether to acquire the auxiliary gaming side selected random number, it is determined whether or not the auxiliary game for acquiring the random number based on the determination result And RJ random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-H There.

  Here, “the random number” in the claims and the present specification including the above includes, for example, “0” to “65535” or “assigned according to the type of random number (for example, winning random number or variation mode determination random number) It is a value randomly selected from a predetermined range such as “0” to “255”. The random number is not limited to a mathematically generated random number, and may be a pseudo random number generated by hardware random number, software random number, or the like. For example, the expression method of each value in the random number is a method (plus one method) in which the values are sequentially expressed along the random number sequence, the next value when the final value of the random number sequence is expressed (initial value There may be mentioned a method (initial value update method) in which)) is determined by a value having chance, a combination of these, and the like. By acquiring random numbers in this manner, it is possible to generate non-periodic random numbers that are unlikely to be expected by the player. Conversely, for example, in the case of the method of generating the next random number using the random number used in a certain lottery, the next random number is likely to be predicted. Therefore, when generating a random number, it is preferable to generate a new random number without using the random number used in the previous lottery.

  Next, the hold control means MJ30 controls the process related to the hold digest and the change start, and the first main game random number obtained in the situation where the first main game symbol change permission has not been lowered. It is determined whether or not to temporarily store, and the first main game symbol holding means MJ32 for holding the random number on the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A until the symbol variation permission is obtained based on the judgment result. It is determined whether or not to temporarily store the second main gaming side random number acquired in a situation where the second main gaming symbol variation permission has not been lowered, and based on the determination result, the symbol variation permission is given to the random number. The second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B for holding in the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and the auxiliary game obtained in the situation where the auxiliary game symbol variation permission has not come down Auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H for determining whether or not to temporarily store a random number, and holding the random number on the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H based on the determination result until the symbol variation permission is obtained. And.

  Here, the reserve / termination control means MJ 31 has a fluctuation start condition satisfaction judging means MJ 31 j which judges whether or not the condition for starting fluctuation is satisfied.

  Next, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B, and the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H can store up to four pieces, combining the random numbers with the holding order The first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, for temporary storage in a fixed form. Have.

  Next, the game content determination means MN, if it is a hit as a result of the success or failure lottery, to a special game if the result of the success or failure lottery, and the chance lottery means MN10 to lottery the availability of the special game and the opening or closing of the second main game start mouth electric role B11d Of the special game transition determination means MN20 (for example, internally turning on the hit flag), symbol content determination means MN40 for determining the stop symbol of each symbol based on each random number, and each random number Based on the variation mode determination means MN 50 for determining the variation mode (variation time etc.) of each symbol, and the limitation frequency fluctuation mode decision to determine the fluctuation mode (variation time etc.) of the main gaming symbol at the time of limitation frequency described later And a means MN52. Here, the lottery means MN10 is a first main game winning lottery with respect to the first main game symbol MN11-A, and a second main game winning lottery means performing a second lottery regarding the second main game symbol It has an MN11-B, and an auxiliary game success / failure lottery means MN11-H for performing a lottery on the auxiliary game symbol. Here, the first main game success or failure lottery means MN11-A, the second main game success or failure lottery means MN11-B, and the auxiliary game success or failure lottery means MN11-H are referred to when performing a success or failure lottery regarding the first main game symbol. First main gaming success / failure lottery table MN11ta-A, second main gaming success / failure lottery table MN11ta-B referred to when performing a 2nd main gaming symbol winning lottery, and a winning / drawing lottery on an auxiliary gaming symbol , And each has a subsidiary gaming lottery table MN11ta-H to be referred to when performing the game. In addition, limitation frequency fluctuation mode decision expedient MN52 is the table which is referred when deciding the fluctuation feature which relates to the main game design at the time of limitation frequency, the fluctuation frequency etc of the main game symbol after the game state and the special game end The reference table of the limited frequency variation mode determination made of a plurality of tables configured to determine the table to be referred to by the table 52t, and at the time of the limited frequency A, which table of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta is referred to Limit frequency counter AMN 52c which counts the number of times of fluctuation of the main game design after the special game end in order to decide or which table of lottery table MN52ta for limit frequency fluctuation mode decision when referring to limit frequency B Limit frequency to count the number of changes of the main game symbol from the end of the special game to determine the A pointer BMN52c-2, has a limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b for temporarily storing information relating to limited frequency (the flag on or off, etc.). When the limitation frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limitation frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta, the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (the second main game variation mode determination lottery table When MN51ta-B) is referenced, (1) the selectivity of the variation mode is different with reference to the common table (ie, the variation aspect to be selected is the same but the selectivity is different), (2) Although the variation mode and the selection rate to be selected are the same, another fixed value is added to the variation time value according to the selected variation mode, (3) different variation mode {first main game variation mode (4) All variations that can be selected There is a variation mode} which does not exist in the lottery table for determination MN51ta-A (the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B) May be configured to like is different. An example of the detailed table configuration will be described later.

  Here, with the limited frequency, the type and / or the selection rate of the variation mode of the main game symbol after the specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation mode of the main game symbol before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed. And / or selectivity is a state (limited frequency state, that is, a state in which a special variation pattern table is selected only in a particular variation period). In addition, as a trigger to become a limited frequency state, in addition to the specific symbol stopping, opening of the big winning opening, stopping of the symbol (big hit symbol, small hitting symbol, etc.) which becomes opening trigger of the big winning opening, there is a timing It is good also as progress of a predetermined number of times of change, etc. from (timing of change start after stop, etc. after specific symbol stop). In addition, with the special fluctuation pattern table, each gaming state (probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state, probability fluctuation gaming state and non time shortening gaming state, non probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state, non probability fluctuation game The main gaming table 3 referred to in the state and non-time shortening gaming state) (not only referred to within the limited period in the current gaming state, but the next big hit in the current gaming state, a small hit or a specific symbol It is a lottery table for variation mode determination other than the variation mode determination lottery table referred to until the stop time. In addition, from the state that refers to the lottery table MN52ta for limitation frequency variation mode determination, from now on, limitation time (especially the one with the state that the second main game start port electric role B11d is easy to open is limited When the frequency A, the second main game start opening electric combination B11d is a state involving a state that is difficult to open may be referred to as limited frequency B), limited frequency state, limited frequency, and the like.

  Here, when executing the winning or losing lottery based on the main gaming random number, the winning or not lottery means MN10 determines whether or not the main gaming random number value is the same value as any of the per random number values, or If part or all of the random number is a continuous number, the main game random number is judged to be equal to or lower than the upper limit of the random number and to be equal to or higher than the lower limit, thereby executing the propriety determination. . By executing such a propriety determination, accurate determination processing can be performed. On the other hand, when performing a yes / no determination by comparison with only the upper limit of the random number range or with only the lower limit, the value at the end of the random number range (for example, 0 or 0 when the range of random numbers is 0 to 1023 Since it is necessary to set 1023) as the random number value, it becomes vulnerable to fraud (for example, it is a fraudulent act of sending current to the main control board M and all the bits in the storage area become 0 or 1 easily) There is a risk of Also, in this example, one random number is used to execute one lottery {If a plurality of random numbers are used in one lottery (so-called two-step lottery is performed), two random numbers are used Because it is necessary to prevent it from being synchronized}.

  Next, the symbol content determination means MN40 obtains the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A which determines the stop symbol of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number), The second main game symbol determination means MN41-B which determines the stop pattern of the second main game symbol based on the determined game content determination random number (the second main game random number) and the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number Auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41-H for determining the stop symbol of the game.

  Here, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A has a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A that is referred to when determining the stop symbol pertaining to the first main game symbol, The said 1st main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A is provided with various lottery tables which differ according to a success / failure result and a game state (For example, regarding a game state, it is for normal game → 1st main game normal game state Lottery table, probability fluctuation game → lottery table for first main game probability fluctuation gaming state, time shortening game → lottery table for first main game time shortening gaming state). In addition, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B has a second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B to be referred to when determining the stop symbol related to the second main game symbol, The second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B is provided with various lottery tables that differ according to the result of the success or the game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game → second main game normal game state lottery Table, probability fluctuation game → lottery table for second main game probability fluctuation game state, time shortening game → lottery table for second main game time shortening game state). An example of the detailed table configuration will be described later. Furthermore, the auxiliary gaming symbol determination means MN41-H has a lottery table MN41ta-H for determining an auxiliary gaming symbol to be referred to when deciding the stop symbol pertaining to the auxiliary gaming symbol, and the lottery for determining the auxiliary gaming symbol The table MN41ta-H is provided with various winning tables which differ depending on the gaming state (normal game → auxiliary gaming regular lottery table, probability fluctuation gaming and time shortening gaming → auxiliary gaming time shortening lottery table).

  Next, the first main game variation mode determination means for determining the variation mode (such as variation time) of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (the first main game random number). A second main game variation mode determination unit MN51-B that determines a variation mode (a variation time etc.) of the second main game symbol based on the MN51-A and the acquired game content determination random number (second main game random number); It has an auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51-H that determines the variation mode (variation time etc.) of the auxiliary game pattern based on the acquired auxiliary game pattern winning random number.

  Here, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A has a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A which is referred to when determining the variation mode according to the first main game symbol Yes, the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A is provided with various lottery tables that differ according to the success or failure result · gaming state (for example, for the gaming state, normal game → first main game normal Lottery table for gaming state, probability fluctuation game → lottery table for first main gaming probability fluctuation gaming state, time shortening game → lottery table for first main gaming time shortening gaming state). Also, the second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B has a second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B to be referred to when determining the variation mode according to the second main game symbol , The second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B is provided with various lottery tables different according to the success or failure result · gaming state (for example, for the game state, normal game → second main game normal game Lottery table for state, probability fluctuation game → lottery table for second main game probability fluctuation game state, time reduction game → lottery table for second main game time reduction game state). An example of the detailed table configuration will be described later. Furthermore, the auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51-H has a lottery table MN51ta-H for determining an auxiliary game variation mode, which is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the auxiliary game symbol, and the auxiliary game variation mode The lottery table for determination MN51ta-H is provided with various winning tables which differ depending on the gaming state (normal game → auxiliary gaming regular lottery table, probability fluctuation game and time shortening gaming → auxiliary gaming time shortening lottery table).

  Next, the display control means MP10 is for a predetermined time on the first main game symbol display area A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 and on the second main game symbol display area B21g of the second main game symbol display device B20. The first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C that performs stop display after changing the first main game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g of the auxiliary game symbol display device H20, for a predetermined time assistance It has the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H which performs control which carries out stop display after changing a game symbol.

  Here, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C have a first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C (decrement counter) which can be cleared to zero. Furthermore, the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H further includes an auxiliary gaming symbol variation management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time.

  Next, in order to determine whether the second main game start opening electric combination opening / closing control means MP20-B satisfies the condition for performing the process of opening and closing the second main game start opening electric combination B11d The second main game start opening electric combination opening and closing condition determination means MP21-B, the second main game start opening electric combination opening timer MP22t to measure the drive (open) time of the second main game start opening electric combination B11d And 有 し B.

  Next, the special game control means MP30 determines whether or not the conditions for shifting to the special game are satisfied, and if the special game transition conditions are satisfied, the contents of the special game (Specifically, the special game content determination means MP32 to determine the special winning opening to be opened, the number of rounds, the time between rounds, etc.) and set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the first big prize Special game execution means MP33 for executing a special game (big hit) to open the mouth C10 or the second large winning opening C20 under a predetermined condition, and time management of various processing related to the special game (for example, the first large winning opening And a special game time management means MP34 for performing C10 and opening / closing time of the second large winning opening C20). Here, the special game execution means MP33 and the first and second big winning opening electric role opening and closing control means MP33-C to open and close the first large winning opening electric role C11d and the second large winning opening electric position C21d There is a winning ball counter MP33c that measures winning balls to the first big winning hole C10 and the second big winning hole C20. The special game time management means MP34 further includes a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time. Further, the special game content determination means MP32 further has a special game content reference table MP32ta to be referred to when specifying the contents of the special game to be set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b (table The details of (not shown).

  Next, small hitting game control means MP40, small hitting game timer MP41t which measures the opening time of the 1st big winning a prize mouth C10 in small hitting game, small hitting game related information which remembers the information which relates to the small hitting game temporarily And temporary storage means MP40b.

  Next, the specific game control means MP50 determines whether or not the termination condition of the probability variation gaming state is satisfied, and whether the termination condition of the time shortening gaming state is satisfied or not. When it is determined that the short game termination condition determination means MP52 is included. Here, the time saving game end condition determining means MP52 has a time reduction counter MP52c capable of counting the time reduction. Here, the “specific game” is, for example, a probability variation game in which the lottery probability for the special game is higher than that in the normal game, or a time reduction game in which the fluctuation time of the main gaming symbol is relatively shorter than that in the normal game. Point to.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the time shortening game, the variation time of the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol is relatively shortened compared to the non-time shortening gaming in progress (time shortening function). Furthermore, the fluctuation time of the auxiliary game symbol is relatively shortened, and the open extension time of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is relatively extended (open time extension function). In addition, the time shortening game in this embodiment ends when the total value of the number of fluctuations of the first main gaming symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second main gaming symbol exceeds a predetermined number (probability fluctuation gaming without time limit restriction) except for). That is, the time reduction number is configured to be subtracted for each change (stop) of the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol. In addition, the above-mentioned probability variation game end condition judging means MP51 and time saving game end condition judging means MP52, for example, the transition lottery from specified game (for example probability fluctuation game and time shortening game) to normal game at predetermined probability every time of symbol fluctuation May have a function to perform (in the case of a so-called pachinko gaming machine having a fall lottery function).

  Next, the game state temporary storage means MB includes a first main game (a game from a change of a first main game symbol to a stop) and a second main game (a change of a second main game symbol to a stop) First and second main gaming state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current gaming state in the game), and auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10- for temporarily storing the current gaming state in the auxiliary game H and special game related information temporary storage means for temporarily storing the current game state in the special game (for example, the number of rounds, the number of winning game balls in any round, various flags related to special games, etc.) Specific game-related information for temporarily storing the MB 20 b and the current game state (for example, the number of remaining time short, the various flags related to the specific game, etc.) in the specific game Has a storage means MB30b, the.

  Here, the first and second main gaming state temporary storage means MB10-C is a stop related to the first or second main gaming symbol (the first or second main gaming symbol for which the variation start condition is established) in the current fluctuation. It has first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C for temporarily storing symbol and variation mode information.

  In addition, the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H is the auxiliary gaming symbol information temporary storage for temporarily storing information such as a stop symbol related to the auxiliary gaming symbol currently being changed (the auxiliary gaming symbol for which the change start condition is satisfied). It has means MB11b-H.

  Next, gaming peripherals will be described. Note that some of the peripheral devices have already been described in detail, so the remaining configuration will be briefly described. First, the gaming peripherals are a first main gaming peripheral A which is a peripheral of the first main gaming side, a second main gaming peripheral B which is a peripheral of the second main gaming side, and a first main gaming side The first and second main game common peripheral device C, which is a common peripheral device on the second main game side, an auxiliary game peripheral device H regarding an auxiliary game, a sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, and a sub sub control unit SS (and effect display device SG) and the like are included. Here, the effects controlled by the sub main control unit SM include the variation of the decorative symbol in a form synchronized in time with the variation of the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol, in the result of the game. It relates to the display of only information that does not affect. Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

  First, the first main game peripheral device A is a first main game start port A10 that triggers a transition to a special game, and a first main game symbol display device A20 that can perform stop display and change display of the first main game symbol. ,have.

  Next, the second main game peripheral device B is a second main game symbol display device B20 capable of the second main game start port B10, which is a trigger for transition to a special game, and the second main game symbol stop display and variable display. And.

  Next, the first and second main game common peripheral devices C are in the closed state at the time of the normal game, and in the special game (big hit), the first big winning opening C10 which is opened under the predetermined condition And the second large winning opening C20.

  Next, the auxiliary gaming peripheral device H is an auxiliary gaming start opening H10 that triggers the opening of the second main game starting opening electric combination B11d of the second main game starting opening B10, and a stop indication and change indication of the auxiliary gaming symbol. And an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 that can be played.

  Next, the effect display control means (sub main control unit) SM is a display information receiving means SM10 for receiving various information from the main control board M side, determination processing of effect contents relating to effect display, and display control processing And an information transmission / reception control means SM40 for controlling information transmission / reception with the sub-sub control unit SS. The respective means will be described in detail below.

  First, the display information receiving means SM10 has a main side information temporary storage means SM11 b for temporarily storing symbol information and display instruction information concerning the first main game and the second main game from the main control board M side. .

  Next, the effect display control means SM20 is a decoration symbol display control means SM21 which controls the variation pattern of the decoration symbol and the determination processing of the stop symbol and the display control processing, and a drawing hold which manages the number of holdings of the decoration symbol and the hold display processing. Information display control means SM22, hold pre-reading effect execution control means SM26 for executing pre-hold look-ahead effect, background effect display control means SM23 for managing background image determination processing and display control processing, and notice effect content determination processing, A preview effect display control means SM24 for controlling the display control process and a reach effect display control means SM25 for determining the reach effect contents determination process and the display control process are included.

  Here, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 relates to the display display content determination means SM21n for determining the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol based on the information from the main control board M side and the symbol variation of the decorative symbol. Mounting display related information temporary storage means SM21b for temporarily storing various information (variation mode information, stop symbol information, various flags, etc.), and a drawing variation time management timer SM21t for measuring the variation time of the decoration symbol ,have. Here, the drawing display content determination means SM 21 n further includes a drawing (reference) table SM 21 ta for determination of the drawing variation content to be referred to when determining the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol (details of the table) Not shown).

  Next, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 has a drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b for temporarily storing information regarding the hold related to the decorative symbol.

  Next, the holding pre-reading effect execution control means SM26 determines holding pre-reading effect executability whether or not holding pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k, and pre-reading related information temporary storage means SM26 b for temporarily storing the information related to the holding pre-reading ,have.

  Next, on the basis of the information from the main control board M, the background effect display control means SM23 temporarily stores the information relating to the background effect display, and the background effect display content determining means SM23n which determines the display content of the background effect. Background production related information for temporary storage means SM23b, and stay stage {group of effect systems, and different stay stages result in different (or different) notice effects, background effects, reach effects, sound modes, etc. Of the awakening stage, the awakening stage stay counter SM23c that measures the number of changes in the awakening stage, and the staying stage of the demonic stage. If there is a devil stage stay counter SM23c-2 that measures the number of changes that stay in the "devil stage". .

  Next, the notice effect display control means SM24 determines, based on the information from the main control board M, the display contents and display timing of the notice effect, etc. The temporary presentation related information temporary storage means SM 24 b for temporarily storing the information.

  Next, the reach effect display control means SM25 determines reach display content determination means SM25n for determining the display content and display timing of the reach effect based on the information from the main control board M side, and information related to the reach effect display And the reach production related information temporary storage means SM 25 b for temporarily storing

  Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is a sub information transmission / reception control means SS10 for controlling information transmission / reception with the sub main control unit SM, and an image display for displaying an image on the display area SG10 on the effect display device SG And control means SS20. Here, the image display control unit SS20 further includes an image display related information temporary storage unit SS21b for temporarily storing information related to display of commands and various images received from the sub main control unit SM side.

  Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is electrically connected to the effect display device SG which displays an image concerning the effect based on the information from the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

  Here, the display area SG10 has a decorative symbol display area SG11 for variably displaying a decorative symbol, and a first hold display unit SG12 (and a second hold display unit SG13) for displaying main game hold information. ing.

  The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20 and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be able to transmit information, and the remaining effect display means (sub sub control unit ) SS is connected to the secondary game control means (sub main control unit) SM so as to be able to transmit information. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20 and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is the sub-game control Means (sub main control unit) means to be controlled by SM. Note that another peripheral device may be controlled via the main control board M and another peripheral device controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication).

  From here, an example of the flow of a general process in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described using a flowchart. The flowchart mainly includes processing steps (shown as rectangles), judgments (shown as diamonds), flow lines (arrows), and terminals (shown as rounded rectangles) indicating start / end / return etc . Also, in the case where the details of the processing steps are illustrated in another flowchart, those referring to the other flowchart are illustrated as a subroutine (shown as a rectangle in which the left and right lines are double lines). . Here, at the development stage of the gaming machine, it is also carried out to simultaneously develop gaming machines with different specifications, but in this example, the subroutine executed by the gaming machines with different specifications in the processing on the main side ( It is configured so as not to leave a subroutine not normally used, and prevents processing relating to an unused subroutine that is not normally executed due to noise or cheating.

  First, FIG. 5 is a main flow chart showing a flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. After the game machine is powered on, the process of FIG. That is, after power on of the gaming machine, after performing initialization (not shown), the main control board M confirms the input port of the RAM clear button in step 1002, and resets the power supply unit E reset button (RAM clear It is determined whether or not the manager of the game arcade has intentionally performed an operation to clear the contents of the RAM. If Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the main control board M clears all the contents of the RAM on the side of the main control board M (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB). Next, in step 1006, the information transmission control means MT transmits ram clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub main control unit SM side (even if it is transmitted at that timing) At this timing, a command may be set and may be configured to be transmitted in a control command transmission process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, if No in step 1002, the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M in step 1008 (for example, it is stored in the checksum and RAM area recorded at the time of power interruption) Compare with the amount of information). Next, in step 1010, the main control board M determines whether the content of the RAM is not normal (whether or not the information at the time of power interruption is correctly backed up in the RAM) based on the check result. If Yes in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to the process of step 1004 (the above-described RAM clear process). On the other hand, if the result of step 1010 is NO, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, the main control board M is stored (backed up) in the RAM of the main control board M in step 1012. The information command is acquired, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side (may be transmitted at the corresponding timing, or the command is set at the corresponding timing to be described later. It may be configured to transmit in the transmission process), and the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the main control board M is triggered by a scheduled execution interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt every about 1.5 ms) related to the main processing on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt cycle is allowed to be T) {as a result, when the execution fixed interrupt timing is reached, the diagram (b) is executed}, and the process proceeds to step 1018. . After the step 1018, the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number updating processes (for example, an increment process of the random number counter) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

  In addition, it is preferable that the initial value of the temporary storage area (RAM, etc.) mounted on the main control board M is configured not to be a value at which the special game is executed. By doing this, in order to prevent the special game from being erroneously executed when the processing for determining the execution of the special game is executed).

  Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The main control board M executes the processing of FIG. 7B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, triggered by the arrival of the scheduled interrupt cycle T (for example, a hardware interrupt every approximately 1.5 ms), at step 1100, the main control board M executes an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1200, the main control board M executes a motorized product drive determination process described later. Next, in step 1300, the main control board M executes a main game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, at step 1400, the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1600, the main control board M executes a special game operating condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1700, the main control board M executes special game control processing described later. Next, at step 1800, the main control board M executes a small hit game control process described later. Next, in step 1997, the main control board M (in particular, the winning ball payout determining means MH) performs a winning ball payout control process (drive control of the winning ball dispensing device KE, etc.) based on the winning opening on which the gaming ball has won. A process for causing the payout control board KH to execute and managing the result is executed. Next, at step 1998, the main control board M executes output processing of an external signal (output of information to an external terminal board, a hall computer HC or the like). Next, in step 1999, the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (sends the command set in each process described above to the sub main control unit side), and is executed immediately before the execution of this interrupt process. It returns to the processing which had been done. In the control command transmission process, the order in which the sub main control unit SM receives the commands is important (for example, the process is normally executed by receiving another command after receiving a certain command) Since there is a case, the command is configured to be transmitted in the order in which the main control board M determines to transmit the command (in the order in which the command is set).

  Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the main control board M is configured such that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and the process of FIG. Be done. That is, when the gaming machine is powered off (in this example, NMI interrupt), in step 1020, the main control board M sets power-off time information (for example, checksum) based on the information of the RAM area. Next, in step 1022, the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area and prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to a power-off wait loop processing.

  Next, FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, at step 1102, the auxiliary game start opening ball determination means MJ11-H determines whether or not the game ball has entered the auxiliary game start port H10 (flow in, in the case of a gate, passage). If Yes in step 1102, in step 1104, the auxiliary gaming random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-H refers to the auxiliary gaming symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ 32b-H, whether or not the holding ball is not the upper limit (for example four) Determine if In the case of Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-H acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the auxiliary gaming symbol holding means MJ 32-H holds the holding ball in the form of setting the random number in the auxiliary gaming symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ 32b-H together with the information indicating the number of the hold. Is incremented by 1, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1200). Also in the case of No in step 1102 or step 1104, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1200).

  Next, FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the motorized prize drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, at step 1202, the second main game start opening electric combination open / close control means MP20-B refers to the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H and the electric combination open flag is off. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H and determines whether or not the auxiliary gaming symbol fluctuation flag is off. Do. If Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the auxiliary gaming symbol holding means MJ32-H accesses the auxiliary gaming symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ 32b-H, and determines whether or not there is a holding ball regarding the auxiliary gaming symbol . In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the auxiliary gaming symbol determination means MN41-H refers to the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H and refers to the gaming state on the auxiliary gaming side (flag state of auxiliary game time short flag). While acquiring, with reference to the lottery table MN41ta-H for auxiliary game symbol determination, the stop design is decided on the basis of the game state of the said auxiliary game side and the auxiliary game symbol random number which is based on the retention sphere (for example, auxiliary game time short flag Is selected, the winning symbol is selected with high probability as compared to the case where it is turned off), and the temporary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H is temporarily stored. Next, at step 1218, the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H is based on the auxiliary gaming side gaming state (the auxiliary gaming time short flag flag state), the auxiliary gaming symbol variation management timer MP11t-C of the auxiliary gaming symbol A predetermined time relating to the fluctuation time (for example, 5 seconds when the auxiliary game time short flag is on, and 30 seconds when the auxiliary game time short flag is off) is set. Then, in step 1220, the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H turns on the auxiliary gaming symbol variation flag in the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the auxiliary gaming symbol holding means MJ32-H updates the holding information recorded in the auxiliary gaming symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H after subtracting 1 from the holding ball relating to the auxiliary gaming symbol. At the same time, the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H starts the auxiliary gaming symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, and then starts the variation display of the auxiliary gaming symbol on the auxiliary gaming symbol display portion H21g.

  Next, at step 1224, the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary gaming symbol variation management timer MP11t-C and determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the auxiliary gaming symbol has been reached. Do. In the case of Yes in step 1224, the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary gaming symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H in step 1226 to acquire the stop symbol of the auxiliary gaming symbol, and the acquired auxiliary The stop symbol of the game symbol is fixedly displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g. Then, at step 1228, the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H turns off the auxiliary gaming symbol variation flag in the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, at step 1230, the second main game start opening electric combination open / close condition determination means MP21-B determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is "hit". In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, the second main game start opening electric combination open / close control means MP20-B is the second main game based on the auxiliary gaming side gaming state (flag state of auxiliary game time short flag) A predetermined time (for example, 6 seconds if the auxiliary game time short flag is on, 0.5 if the auxiliary game time short flag is off, for example, the auxiliary game time short flag is on) Set the second). Next, at step 1234, the second main game start opening electric combination open / close control means MP20-B turns on the electric combination open flag in the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H. . Then, in step 1236, the second main game start opening electric combination open / close control means MP20-B opens the second main game start opening electric combination B11d. Next, in step 1238, the second main game start opening electric combination open / close control means MP20-B refers to the second main game start opening electric combination open timer MP22t-B, at the open time of the electric combination. It is determined whether or not the predetermined time has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1238, in step 1240 and step 1242, the second main game start opening electric combination open / close control means MP20-B closes the second main game start opening electric combination B11 d and the auxiliary gaming state is temporary. In the flag area of the storage means MB10-H, the motorized part open flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1300).

  If NO in step 1202, the process proceeds to step 1238. If NO in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224. If NO in step 1206, step 1224 or step 1230, the next process It transfers to (the process of step 1300).

  Moreover, in this flowchart, after the stop symbol display in step 1226 for convenience, although it transfers to the following step immediately after, it is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to shift to the next process after the stop display fixed time of about 500 ms (for example, this process is performed by performing the branch process using the stop display fixed flag and the timer). Is achievable).

  Next, FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the first main game start slot entrance ball determining means MJ11-A is the first main game start slot entrance detection device A11s of the first main game start slot A10, and the first main game start slot entrance information Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-A refers to the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ 32b-A, and the main game Side) determines whether the holding ball for the side is not the upper limit (for example, 4 pieces). In the case of Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-A acquires a first main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as a first main game content determination random number, a lottery random number for determining success or failure, a symbol lottery random number for determining a symbol when hit, and a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol are determined. Three random numbers of variation mode lottery random number to be acquired. Incidentally, these three random numbers are generated from random number generation means having different update cycles and random number ranges, respectively, and are obtained sequentially at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the first main game symbol holding means MJ 32-A temporarily stores (holds) the acquired first main game content determination random number in the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ 32b-A. . Next, in step 1310, the suspension control means MJ30 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b, and the special game execution flag and the small hit execution flag Is determined whether or not it is off. In the case of Yes in step 1310, the hold control means MJ 30 determines in step 1312 whether or not the main game time short flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b is off. In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the holding control means MJ 30 determines in advance the result and the stop symbol relating to the stored holding based on the holding information (the winning random number and the symbol determination random number). Next, at step 1316, the hold control means MJ30 sets the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the command regarding the newly generated hold yes / no result and the stop symbol information to the sub main control unit SM (step It is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of 1999), and the process shifts to step 1318. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the information related to the stop symbol determined in advance is configured to be transmitted to the sub side, the "HA" that the determination result in advance is the stop symbol related to the loss of the first main game In the case of “HB” and in the case of “HB”, commands relating to different stop symbols will be sent to the sub side (as shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, there are multiple types of stop symbols relating to lost) ing).

  Next, in step 1318, the suspension control means MJ30, based on the suspension information (random number for variation mode determination), the variation mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode group (non-short time variation mode group and time variation mode) It is determined in advance (for the variation mode random number division information and the variation mode group, refer to the main gaming table 3 and the limited frequency table in FIGS. 14 to 17). In the present embodiment, one variation mode group is configured to include a plurality of types of variation modes (variation times). Next, in step 1320, the hold control means MJ30 executes a command (a hold generation command of the first main game content determination random number, a command related to the variation mode random number division information, etc.) related to the new hold generation, the sub main control unit SM. To the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to (to be transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999), and proceeds to step 1322. In addition, when it is comprised so that symbol information may be transmitted to a sub side like this embodiment, the production which suggests a big hit may be performed as a production performed by a sub side, and when it is set as such composition, It is desirable to be able to notify the player of the stop symbol of the main gaming symbol to be the big hit (informing the stop symbol only when the stop symbol of the main gaming symbol is a big hit). Also, in the case of No in step 1302, step 1304, step 1310 or step 1312, the processing shifts to step 1322.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the main game content determination random number (the first main game content determination random number or the second main game content determination random number) is acquired (or when the hold occurs), the fluctuation mode random number division information, the fluctuation mode group Are configured to determine

  It should be noted that the main game content determination random number information, the pass / fail random number delimiter information, the variation mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode group information may be transmitted to the sub side at the timing when the hold occurs, but further, the sub side Information to be sent to is not limited to this, information related to the stop symbol of the main game symbol, information related to the profit mode of the main game symbol to be a big hit (the number of rounds of special games according to the main game symbol to be stopped, etc. ), The number of reservations immediately after the holding winnings (only the number of holdings on the first main gaming side or the second main gaming side that has won the prize, or the number of holdings on both the first main gaming side and the second main gaming side may be used) May be configured to be able to transmit information pertaining to, etc. {Convenient random number division information refers to the respective gaming states on the first main game side (second main game side) and random value (or random value range) And the success and failure lottery results, and grouping It is one of the random number division information, for example, a probability change gaming state, a non-probability change gaming state, a loss, a probability change gaming state or a non-probability change gaming state, hit, probability If it is a fluctuation gaming state, it is a hit, but if it is a non-probability fluctuation gaming state, a grouping such as a loss can be mentioned}.

  Next, in step 1322, the second main game start slot entrance ball determining means MJ11-B is operated from the second main game start slot entrance detector B11s of the second main game start slot B10. It is determined whether the information has been received. In the case of Yes in step 1322, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-B refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ 32b-B in step 1324, and the main game (especially the second main game Side) determines whether the holding ball for the side is not the upper limit (for example, 4 pieces). In the case of Yes in step 1324, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-B acquires a second main game content determination random number in step 1326. In the present embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, similarly to the first main game content determination means, three random numbers of success lottery random number, symbol lottery random number, and variation aspect lottery random number are acquired. By the way, the acquisition range of each random number of the first main game content determination random number and the acquisition range of each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, the lottery random number for the first main game and the lottery random number for the second main game Acquisition range of) is set to the same. Next, in step 1328, the second main game symbol holding means MJ 32-B temporarily stores (holds) the acquired second main game content determination random number in the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ 32b-B. . Next, in step 1330, the suspension control means MJ30 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b, and the special game execution flag or the small hit execution flag It is determined whether the is on. In the case of Yes in step 1330, in step 1334, the suspension control means MJ 30 determines in advance the result and the symbol of suspension regarding the stored suspension based on the suspension information (the lottery random number and the symbol determination random number). Next, in step 1336, the hold control means MJ30 sets the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the command regarding the newly generated hold yes / no result and the stop symbol information to the sub main control unit SM (step It is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of 1999), and the process shifts to step 1338.

  In the case of No at step 1330, the hold control means MJ30 determines at step 1332 whether or not the main game time short flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b is off. In the case of Yes in step 1332, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400). On the other hand, if No in step 1332, the process moves to step 1334.

  Next, in step 1338, the suspension control means MJ30, based on the suspension information (random number for variation mode determination), the variation mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode group (non-short time variation mode group and time variation mode) The group) is determined in advance (for the variation mode random number division information and the variation mode group, refer to the main gaming table 3 and the limited frequency table in FIG. 14 to FIG. 17). Next, in step 1340, the hold control means MJ 30 executes a command related to the new hold generation (a hold generation command of the second main game content determination random number, a command related to the variation mode random number division information, etc.) To the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to (to be transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999), and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1400). Also in the case of No in step 1322 or step 1324, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400).

  Incidentally, although storage of the first main game content determination random number and storage of the second main game content determination random number are executed in steps 1308 and 1328, the main game content determination random number is stored in the storage area of the RAM of the main control board. In the case of storing a memory, a dedicated storage area is secured, and only information related to the "main game content determination random number" is stored in the byte storing the information related to the main game content determination random number (various timers It is preferable to configure so as not to store other information such as a value (when operating another data stored in the same 1 byte, the information related to the main game content determination random number is rewritten due to noise etc. To prevent it). In addition, with regard to the lottery random number, the change in the gaming state (the gaming state relating to the suspension recorded already) is obtained during the period from when the lottery random number is obtained to when the lottery for the Not only the change but also a change in the gaming state may occur due to the newly generated suspension, so the gaming state at the time of the execution of the lottery for the lottery random number may be unpredictable. It is comprised so that the said lottery random number may be memorize | stored until it performs. In this embodiment, in the non-time shortening gaming state, the command to the sub main control unit SM related to the information on suspension can be transmitted only at the time of holding occurrence according to the first main game, but in the time shortening gaming state Although it was configured to be able to transmit only at the hold occurrence according to the second main game, regardless of which gaming state is the hold related to the first main game or the hold related to the second main game The command may be configured to be transmitted, and in such a case, the sub main control unit SM may be configured to determine whether to use the received command. In addition, a specific example of the command related to the pass / fail result information to be sent to the sub main control unit SM is “D000H: Missing, D001H: Missing with low confidence, Hit with high confidence, D002H: Hit with both low confidence and high confidence, D003H : A small hit, and a specific example of a command related to stop symbol information to be sent to the sub main control unit SM is "D100H: 16R per variation, D101H: 16R non per variation, D102H: 2R per variation", sub A specific example of the command related to the variation mode random number division information to be transmitted to the main control unit SM is “D 200 H: division 1 (group 1 if time reduction gaming state, group 1 if non-time reduction gaming state, group 1 if limited frequency state) , D201H: break 2 (group 1 if time reduction gaming state, group 2 if non-time reduction gaming state, group G if limited frequency state -Loop 1), D202H: has separated 3 (time saving game state if Group 2, Group 2 for non-time reduction gaming state, group 1 if limited frequency state).

  Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, at step 1401, the reserve / termination control means MJ 31 refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ 32b-B to check whether or not there is a second main game symbol hold. If Yes in step 1401, in step 1400 (1), the game content determination means MN executes a first main game symbol display process described later, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1500). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1401, the game content determination means MN executes a second main game symbol display process described later in step 1400 (2), and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1600).

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when there is a holding ball of the second main game symbol, regardless of the presence of the holding ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning sequence is the first main game symbol) The second main game symbol is configured to be prioritized and executed, but it is not limited to this. May be configured to execute a parallel lottery that randomly draws).

  Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. In addition, since this processing is substantially the same processing on the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Write in parentheses. First, in step 1403, the reserve / termination control unit MJ 31 determines whether or not a change start condition is established. Here, the change start condition is not during special game (or during operation of the condition device), and is not during main game symbol fluctuation, and there is a suspension of the main game symbol, and it is not during small hit game Is the condition. In addition, although not illustrated in this example, when the fluctuation fixed time (time to stop and display the finalized display symbol after the final display of the main gaming symbol) is provided, the fluctuation start condition of the next fluctuation during the fluctuation fixed time May not be satisfied.

  In the case of Yes in step 1403, in step 1405 and step 1406, the holding and digesting control means MJ31 is used as the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) While reading out the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) related to the present symbol variation temporarily stored, the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ 32b-A (second main game The symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ 32b-B) is deleted, and the remaining information temporarily stored is shifted (holding and digesting processing). Next, in step 1408, the lottery means MN10 refers to the first main gaming coin lottery table MN11ta-A (the second main gaming coin lottery MN11ta-B) corresponding to each gaming state, the first main game Based on the game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (in particular, the winning lottery random number), the main gaming symbol acceptance lottery is executed.

  Here, FIG. 13 (main game table 1) is an example of a first main game use lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game use lottery table MN11ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability variation gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot probability in the non-probability variation gaming state. The winning probability is merely an example, and is not limited to this. Further, in the present embodiment, although the example in which the game state can not be shifted (so-called small hit) is illustrated, a small hit may not be generated (a small hit is won). Further, in the present embodiment, while there are a plurality of (first example, two types of “HA” and “HB”) lost symbols on the first main game side, there is a single missing symbol on the second main game side ( In this example, "HC") is configured to be present. The number of lost symbols on the side of the first main game (second main game) is merely an example, and there is no limitation to this (for example, the number of lost symbols on the first main game side is three or more). The first main game side lost symbol may be single and the second main game side lost symbol may be plural, or both of the first main game and the second main game side may be plural. ). Also, in this example, in the first main game side lost symbol, the ratio of “HA” is configured to be larger than the ratio of “HB”, but is not limited thereto (for example, “HB” The ratio may be configured to be larger than the “HA” ratio, or these may be equal ratios).

  Next, in step 1410, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A (the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B) is the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (the second main game symbol determination) For the main gaming symbol based on the main gaming symbol equality lottery result and the first main gaming content determination random number (the second main gaming content determination random number) (especially, the symbol lottery random number) with reference to the lottery table MN41ta-B) for Are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C.

  Here, FIG. 13 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won, a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, "3A, 4A, 5A, 7A, 9A" and "3B, 4B, 5B, ... One of the main game symbols from 7B ′ ′) is configured to be determined as a big hit symbol. In addition, 3A, 3B and 4B are 2R short opening big hit (the opening time of big winning opening is compared with the long opening big hit of 3A, 3B and 4B) the number of rounds of special game and the opening time of big winning opening determined with reference to the main game design Big opening), 4A, 5A, 9A and 5B 4R long opening big hit (opening time of the big winning opening is a long hit compared to short opening big hit), 7A and 7B 16R long opening big hit (big hit opening opening time is a big hit that is long compared to short open big hit). The random number value and the type of stop symbol are only examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the present embodiment, two types of lost symbols on the first main game side ("HA" and "HB" 2 types) and 1 type (1 type of "HC") is provided on the 2nd main game side, but it is not limited to this, in both 1st main game side and 2nd main game side, A plurality of types of lost symbols may be provided, and any number of lost symbols on the first main game side and the second main game may be one type.

  Next, in step 1412, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A (the second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B) refers to the flag area of the limitation frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b, and the limitation frequency It is determined whether the A flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1412, in step 1450, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A (second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B) performs limited frequency A variation mode determination processing described later, Control goes to step 1418. On the other hand, if No in step 1412, in step 1414, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A (second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B) is a flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. To determine whether the limit frequency B flag is on. If Yes in step 1414, in step 1500, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A (second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B) performs limited frequency B variation mode determination processing, which will be described later, Control goes to step 1418. If No in step 1414, in step 1416, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A (the second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B) is a first main game variation corresponding to each gaming state. With reference to the form determination lottery table MN51ta-A (the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B), the main gaming symbol acceptance lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) The variation mode of the main game symbols is determined based on (in particular, the variation mode lottery random number), these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the process proceeds to step 1418.

  Here, the main gaming table 3 shown in FIGS. 14 to 17 is an example of a first main gaming variation mode determining lottery table MN51ta-A (a second main gaming variation mode determining lottery table MN51ta-B) In the figure, not only the main gaming table 3 but also the limited frequency table are shown simultaneously, which will be described later). As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) of the main gaming symbol with respect to a random number can be determined based on the main gaming symbol short result status and the main gaming time short flag status of the main gaming symbol. It is done. For example, with regard to a random number value, when the main lottery is a winning or losing lottery result, it is easy to determine the fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time is relatively long, when the main game time short flag is on (time reduction game In the state (1), a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively short is easily determined. Note that this example is just an example and is not limited at all to the type of the variation mode (variation time) or the selectivity. In addition, the symbol variation time of the first main game may be relatively long in the time shortening gaming state (when the main game short flag is on) {symbol variation on the second main game When it is configured to be advantageous for the player to be executed, it is easy for the second main game side to be suspended by lowering the symbol variation efficiency on the first main game side (as it is advantageous for the player) In order to construct a situation, it is particularly effective when the starting opening on the first main game side and the starting opening on the second main game side can not be separated.

  In addition, as shown in this figure (in particular, FIG. 15), in the present embodiment, regarding the variation mode of the first main game side, the result of the lottery result is lost and the determined symbol (during the reserve digestion) When the symbol to be stopped is "HA", a variation mode that is a short time (in this example, variation time is 15 seconds or less) is easily selected (that is, an effect with a relatively low probability of big hit is selected Easy to configure). On the other hand, in the present example, regarding the variation mode of the first main game side, when the success or failure lottery result is lost and the determination symbol is “HB” in the non-time shortening gaming state, the relative is more than the case where the determination symbol is “HA”. Of the fluctuation time which is a long time (in this example, fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more) is easy to be selected (that is, it is easy to be selected the production with a relatively high expectation of big hit), and The average value is configured to be relatively long. Moreover, in the present embodiment, regarding the variation mode on the first main game side, in the case of the non-time shortening gaming state, if the result of the lottery is a loss and the determination symbol is “HB”, the determination symbol is more than “HA”. A predetermined variation mode (for example, a variation mode of 120 seconds) which is a long time is configured to be easily selected. It should be noted that a plurality of types of stop symbols for losing the second main game may be provided, and in such a case, the above-described configuration (configuration according to "HA" and "HB") is used as the second main You may apply to the stop symbol which concerns on the loss by the side of a game.

  Next, at step 1418, the game content determination means MN temporarily changes the symbol variation display start instruction command (stop symbol information, attribute information of stop symbol) temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. Set the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM the information related to the determined main gaming symbol such as fluctuation mode information etc. and the command relating to the current gaming state etc. The processing is sent to the sub main control unit SM side). Next, in step 1420, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C set the predetermined time relating to the change time of the main game symbol to the first and second main game symbol change management timer MP11t-C. Do. Next, in step 1422, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C is the first main game symbol display area A21g (first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). In accordance with the variation mode stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C on the second main game symbol display portion B21g), the variable display of the main game symbol is started. Next, in step 1424, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn on the fluctuating flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, Control goes to step 1428.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1403, in step 1426, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, and changes. It is determined whether the medium flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1426, the process proceeds to step 1428, and in the case of No in step 1426, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600).

  Next, in step 1428, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C determine whether or not a predetermined time related to the change time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1428, in step 1430, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C send information (design confirmation display instruction command) indicating that symbol variation is finished to the sub main control unit SM side The command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission is set (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999). Next, in step 1432, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C is the first main game symbol display area A21g (first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The variation display of the main game symbol on the second main game symbol display section B21g) is stopped, and the stop symbol stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C is displayed as the fixed stop symbol Control. Next, in step 1434, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn off the fluctuating flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. .

  Next, in step 1436, the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a big hit symbol. Do. In the case of Yes in step 1436, in step 1438, the game content determination means MN turns on the condition device activation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 1550. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1436, the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C in step 1440, and the stop symbol of the main game symbol is small. It is determined whether or not it is a hit symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1440, the game content determination means MN turns on the small hit flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b in step 1442, and proceeds to step 1550. Also in the case of No at step 1440, the process proceeds to step 1550.

  Next, in step 1550, the specific game control means MP50 executes a specific game end determination process described later, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1600). Also in the case of No at step 1428, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 11 is a flowchart of limited frequency A variation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. 10 (in the present embodiment, as described above, the limited frequency A is the second main game start) It has become a limited frequency accompanied by the fact that it is in the state where it is easy to open mouth electric power item B11d). First, in step 1452, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN 52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN 52c, and the counter value is the continuation possibility value (the second main game start opening motorized combination B11d is easily opened state = time reduction game It is a value related to the variation that may become the final variation of the variable. In this example, it is determined whether or not 41 and 1). In the case of Yes in step 1452, in step 1454, the restriction frequency fluctuation mode determination means MN 52 refers to the restriction frequency fluctuation mode determination lottery table MN 52 ta (limit frequency table A-1), and the main gaming side random number Based on this, the variation mode (variation time) related to the main gaming symbol is determined, and the process moves to step 1458. Here, the continuity permission value is a counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN 52c at which the time reduction gaming state can end, and in the present embodiment, the number of time reductions that can be granted after the end of the special game is 20 times or 60 times. The counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN 52c becomes the continuation possibility value before the start of the 20th and 60th fluctuations from the end of the special game.

  Here, the tables shown in FIGS. 14 to 17 are an example of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN 52 ta (in particular, the limited frequency table A-1). As shown in the present example, in the present embodiment, the limit frequency table is used when the limit frequency counter A flag is on and the limit frequency counter value is the continuation possibility value (in this example, 41 or 1). A-1 is referred to.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1452, in step 1456, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN 52 refers to the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN 52 ta (limit frequency table A-2), and the main gaming side random number As a result, based on the stop symbol related to the main game symbol, the change mode (change time) related to the main game symbol is determined, and the process moves to step 1458.

  Here, the tables shown in FIG. 14 to FIG. 17 are an example of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN 52 ta (in particular, the limited frequency table A-2). As shown in the present example, in the present embodiment, the limit frequency is set when the limit frequency counter A flag is on and the limit frequency counter value is other than the continuation possibility value (in this example, 41 or 1). Table A-2 is referred to.

  Next, in step 1458, the limited frequency change mode determining means MN 52 subtracts 1 from the count value of the limited frequency counter AMN 52c. Next, in step 1460, the limited frequency change mode determining means MN 52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN 52c to determine whether the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1460, in step 1462, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN 52 turns off the limited frequency A flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN 52b, and executes the next process (step 1418). Transition to processing). Also in the case of No at step 1460, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing at step 1418).

  Next, FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the limited frequency B fluctuation mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. 10 (as described above, the second main game start opening motorized part B11 d is a limited frequency B) Is a limited frequency with being difficult to open). First, in step 1502, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency variation mode determining lottery table MN 52ta (limited frequency table B), and determines the main gaming side random number, the result of the winning lottery, the stop symbol for the main gaming symbol Based on it, the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol is determined. Next, in step 1504, the limited frequency change mode determining means MN 52 subtracts 1 from the count value of the limited frequency counter BMN 52c-2. Next, in step 1506, the limited frequency change mode determining means MN 52 refers to the limited frequency counter BMN 52c-2 and determines whether the counter value is 0 or not. In the case of Yes in step 1506, in step 1508, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN 52 turns off the limited frequency B flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN 52b, and the next process (step 1418). Transition to processing). Also in the case of No in step 1506, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1418).

  Here, the limited frequency table B shown in FIGS. 14 to 17 is an example of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN 52 ta. As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the limit frequency table B is referred to when the limit frequency B flag is on.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 14 to FIG. 17, the variation mode random number division information and the variation mode determination lottery table according to the present embodiment will be described in detail. As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, the variation mode random number division information is configured to be determined for a certain random number value (or random number value range). The variation mode random number division information is provided in each table of the first main game when it hits (when it loses) and the second main game when it hits (when it loses). More specifically, it is divided into two divisions of division 1 to division 2 at the time of the loss of the second main game side (the variation mode in which the fluctuation time of the main gaming symbol can be the shortest time is the division 1 to the main game The variation mode in which the variation time of the symbol can be the longest is the division 2), and it is divided into three divisions at the time of hitting the first main game side and hitting the second main game side (of the main game pattern The variation mode in which the variation time can be the shortest is 1; the variation mode in which the variation time of the main gaming symbol is the longest is 3) and 1 to 4 during the loss on the first main game side Divided into up to four divisions (The fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time of the main gaming symbol can be the shortest time is division 1, and the fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time of the main gaming symbol can be the longest time is the division 4) .

  Also, whether the main game time short flag is on / off and the table to be referred to is a normal (non-limit frequency) variation mode determination table or a limit frequency table? {Limit frequency flag (limit frequency A flag or Random frequency value of fluctuation time and fluctuation mode group depending on ON / OFF of the restriction frequency B flag) (furthermore, regarding the restriction frequency A flag, whether the counter value of the restriction frequency counter A is a predetermined value or not) The range is configured to be different (for example, the range of the random number is different even in the same group 1), and by transmitting the variation mode random number division information to the sub side, the variation according to these gaming states The aspect group is configured to be able to be derived on the sub side. That is, when the gaming state transitions between the occurrence of the hold and the conclusion of the hold, the variation mode group scheduled at the occurrence of the hold may differ from the variation mode group executed at the conclusion of the hold. (For example, the fluctuation mode group was scheduled to become group 1 because the non-time shortening gaming state occurs at the time of occurrence of holding, but the actual fluctuation mode group becomes group 2 because the time shortening gaming state is reached at the conclusion of holding). As for fluctuation mode random number division information in which a common fluctuation mode group is assigned across all gaming states, the variation mode random number division information is received by the sub-side (following game states) It is possible to properly execute so-called pending pre-reading effect without considering the transition). Note that “common” in FIGS. 14 to 17 in this embodiment means that fluctuation time and fluctuation mode of table contents are common, but (1) fluctuation modes differ and fluctuation time value Are the same, (2) the effect mode to be executed is the same, (3) the same effect mode regardless of the gaming state (e.g. regardless of the gaming state such as the probability variation gaming state or the non-probability variation gaming state) Although the processing (allocation of variation pattern numbers, etc.) in the main control board M is different, the effect mode may be “common” to be substantially the same. Moreover, you may be comprised so that the candidate of the fluctuation | variation aspect which may be selected, and / or the number of candidates may differ by stop symbol (decision symbol). In addition, the fluctuation mode random number division information in Figure 14-Figure 17, depending on whether it is the fluctuation of the 1st main game side or the fluctuation of the 2nd main game side and whether the result of the lottery is a hit or a loss, Although it was constituted to form different fluctuation mode random number division information, it is not limited to this, whether it is fluctuation of the 1st main game side or 2nd main game side and whether it is a hit lottery result One variation mode random number delimiter information including a loss may be formed.

  Moreover, as shown to this figure, in this example, it is comprised so that fluctuation time may differ according to the number of pending | holding. For example, with regard to the first main gaming symbol variation in the non-time shortening gaming state, when the success or failure lottery result is lost and the lost symbol is "HA", the variation mode determination table contents to be referred to according to the number of reservations on the first main game side (Change the contents of the variation mode determination table to be referred to in the case where the number of reservations is 0 to 1 and in the case where the number of reservations is 2 and 3). That is, when the determined symbol when the success or failure lottery result is a loss, if the design symbol is "HA", the fluctuation time (and the presentation mode) may differ depending on the number of reservations at the start of the fluctuation Is configured to be indeterminate}, but when the decision pattern in the case of the result of the success or failure lottery is “HB” is “HB”, the fluctuation time (and the presentation mode) regardless of the number of reservations at the time of reservation ) Is configured so that it can be determined. In addition, this example is only an example to the last, and the number of holdings used as the reference | standard which switches the fluctuation mode determination table content can be changed suitably (for example, it is set as 3 divisions of 0, 1-2-3 or 0) -It may be one, two, three four segments, etc.). In addition, it is configured that the fluctuation time may differ depending on the number of reservations at the start of fluctuation, in both cases where the decision symbol is “HA” and “HB” when the success / failure lottery result is a loss. You may As a configuration example when configured as such, (1) the difference between the average value of fluctuation time when the number of reservations is 0-1 and the average value of fluctuation time when the number of reservations is 2-3 If the decision symbol is "HB" than if it is "HA", the configuration is smaller (2) If the decision symbol is "HB" than if it is "HA" The configuration may be such that the probability that the variation mode (variation time) is determined without dependency is high (the random number range is wide).

  Here, in this example, regarding the symbol variation of the first main game side at the time of non-time shortening gaming state, when the result of the lottery is a loss and the determined symbol is “HA”, the number of reservations is 0 to 1 If the random number is "0 to 799", the group 1 is selected. If the random number is "800 to 1023", the group 2 is selected. If the number of reservations is 2 to 3, the random number is random. Is “0 to 899”, the group 1 is selected, and the random number is “900 to 1023” is the group 2. Therefore, if the random number value is "0 to 799", the variation mode group is determined to be group 1, and if the random number value is "900 to 1023", the variation mode group is determined to be group 2, but the random number value In the case of “800 to 899”, it is unclear whether the variation mode group becomes the group 1 or the group 2 until the end of the hold. In other words, when the determination symbol in the case of the success or failure lottery result being a loss is "HA", a random value (or random value range) in which the variation mode group can be uniquely determined (in this example, "0-0" There are random numbers (or random numbers from 799 "or" 900 to 1023 ") and random patterns (or random number ranges for which the variation mode group is hard to determine uniquely) (in this example, random numbers from" 800 to 899 "). In order to pre-read effects for which the decision symbol in the case of the failure lottery result is “HA” to perform the pre-reading effect for the hold, the change is actually belonging to which fluctuation mode group at the time of the hold process. It may be necessary to determine the number of reservations to determine the In addition, it is desirable to be configured to be able to execute the pre-reading lottery when the newly generated pending variation mode group is a random value (or a random value range) that can be uniquely determined. It is possible to execute an appropriate prefetch lottery (for example, when the random number value for a certain hold is “900 to 1023”, the number of remaining holds at the time of the digestion of the certain hold is any case) Even if it is configured to execute reach presentation in the variation mode group of "group 2" because it becomes "group 2", when the certain hold occurs, the decision regarding the certain hold is made Even if the symbol is scheduled to be "HA", it will be possible to execute the pre-hold effect on hold = it is known that reach effect will eventually occur. Only does not occur inconsistency be executed pending read-ahead performance of).

  In this example, the fluctuation time included in each group is the fluctuation time in the same range (for example, at the time of losing, the fluctuation time is 15 seconds or less in the group 1 regardless of whether or not it is a time shortening gaming state). (Including, but not limited to, variations in the time), and the variation time that can be selected is completely different (for example, in the non-time shortening gaming state, the variation time of 10 to 120 seconds is selected, the time In the reduced gaming state, when 1 to 5 seconds and 10 seconds of fluctuation time is selected), a certain gaming state is not divided into fluctuation mode groups by an absolute fluctuation time independent of the gaming state. Divide the fluctuation group by the relative fluctuation time in (for example, in the non-time shortening gaming state, the fluctuation time is 10 to 15 seconds fluctuation in the group 1, the time shortening gaming state Time Group 1 variation of 1.5 seconds, and isolate) as may be configured. Moreover, it is not limited to dividing a group according to fluctuation time, for example, group information (for example, one of a plurality of reach effects in which character A appears is executed, for example, group information divided based on the execution content of the effect) Range information obtained by dividing the fluctuation to perform any of the reach effects of the group A and the plurality of reach effects in which the character B appears as the group B, that is, the jackpot when the reach effect is performed The expectation and the linked information may be transmitted to the sub side.

  According to the configuration of the present example, in the case where the gaming state can be different between the timing when the certain hold occurs and the timing when the certain hold is digested in the certain reserve to be the target of the prefetch effect (for example, the certain hold) It is possible to execute an appropriate pre-reading effect in consideration of a transition of the gaming state such as when the reserve to be digested earlier is a big hit etc.). More specifically, when a non-probability fluctuation gaming state is reached at the timing of a certain holding with respect to a certain holding occurring at the time of probability fluctuation gaming state, the fluctuation mode group included in the fluctuation mode random number division information regarding the certain holding All belong to a group with a high expectation value (even if the gaming state changes, the expected degree of suspension can be maintained), or the same variation mode in the probability variation gaming state and the non-probability variation gaming state In the case of being a group, it is possible to execute prefetching effects relating to a certain hold, and a group having a low expectation value when referring to the non-probable fluctuation gaming state as a change mode group included in the fluctuation mode random number division information relating to the certain hold Changes in the game status may decrease the expected degree of suspension, or the probability fluctuation gaming state and non-probability If the different fluctuation mode group and a rate change gaming state, and infeasible prefetching effect related to the certain pending, it can be an equal.

  Also, as an example in which the gaming state transitions in this way, and the scheduled variation mode group and the variation mode group to be actually executed may differ, (1) there are a plurality of holds in the main game hold In the current situation, a certain hold in the main game hold is digested and becomes a big hit (or small hit), and after the end of the special game related to the certain hold (or after the end of the bonus game for the small hit), the gaming state transitions ( For example, the transition from the non-probability fluctuation gaming state to the probability fluctuation gaming state), and the example of the variation mode group of the suspension within the main gaming suspension which remains at the time of the certain suspension may be different, (2) special game end The game state is transitioned after the main gaming symbol has been changed a predetermined number of times from the end (or after the small hit end) (for example, the time shortening gaming state after the special game end, the main game symbol 50 times after the special game end It is configured to be able to transition to a non-time shortening gaming state etc.) at the moved timing, etc., and the hold that occurs before the predetermined number of changes of the main game symbol end after the special game end (or after the small hit end), An example in which the variation mode group may be different when the special game is digested after the predetermined number of times of variation of the main gaming symbol is over after the special game is ended, (3) the main gaming symbol of when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state It is configured to execute a lottery (so-called fall lottery) to shift to the non-probability fluctuation gaming state for each fluctuation, and trigger hold occurs in the probability fluctuation play state, and by winning the fall lottery before the trigger hold is digested An example etc. in which a variation mode group may differ are mentioned.

  Further, in the present embodiment, for example, the same variation mode group (for example, group 1 when the main game time short flag is on and the group when the main game time short flag is off) by turning on / off the main game time short flag Even in the case of 1), the range of random numbers included in the same variation mode group is configured to be different, and variation mode random number delimiter information consisting only of the range of the different random numbers (for example, the second main There are a plurality of divisions 1) at the time of hitting the lottery table for determining the game variation mode. In addition, variation mode random number division information (for example, the second main) consisting of only a range of random numbers included in the case of both main game time short flag being on and off within the range of random numbers possessed by the same variation mode group There is also a break 3) at the time of hitting the lottery table for determining the game variation mode. The number of types of variation mode random number division information in each table (for example, four of the division 1 to the division 4 at the time of losing of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table) is the number of types of variation mode groups (For example, it is configured to be more than three in group 1 to group 3 at the time of losing of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the group 3 (group C) of the variation mode groups may be selected as the variation mode group only when it is scheduled to have a variation time (60 seconds or more in this example) for a predetermined time or more. It is configured as follows. Therefore, when the group 3 (group C) in the variation mode group is selected, the variation time is relatively long {in other words, the expectation of becoming a big hit is high (the variation mode which can be selected) The percentage of the domestic jackpot will increase)). In addition, as shown in FIG. 15, group 3 may be configured to be more easily selected (with a wider range of random numbers) in the non-time shortening gaming state than in the time shortening gaming state {time shortening During the gaming state (especially in the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state), by configuring the fluctuation that makes the fluctuation time to be short is easy to be selected, the time required to the next big hit is shortened, It can reduce stress. In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, the second main game start opening electric role B11d is easy to be opened, it is easy to enter the second main game start opening B10, it is difficult to occur a situation where there is no hold} . In addition, it is not limited to this, and may be configured to be easily selected when the group 3 is in the time shortening gaming state than in the non-time shortening gaming state {during time shortening gaming (especially, probability fluctuation gaming state and time Since the reduced gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than during the non-time reduced gaming state, it is effective to use the effect with a high degree of expectation to get the player's sense of expectation}. In addition, the policy on grouping of variation mode groups may be changed as appropriate, and the number of groups and the number and type of variation modes (variation time) belonging to each group are limited to the above examples. Absent. For example, in the present example, those belonging to group 3 (group C) are “those that are scheduled to have a fluctuation time longer than a predetermined time”, but in addition to this, “the fluctuation time that is the longest time that can be selected” It is also possible to assume that it is scheduled to become or "the average value of the variation modes (variation time) belonging to the group is a predetermined time or more", or "the jackpot is determined". In addition, the fluctuation mode is correlated with the presentation modes (for example, lost presentation, normal reach presentation, super reach presentation 1, super reach presentation 2, big hit confirmed super reach presentation, etc.) executed by the sub main control unit SM. You may comprise so that a group may be divided (a loss production corresponding | compatible fluctuation | variation mode group, a normal reach production corresponding | compatible fluctuation | variation group group, ..., a big hit decision super reach production | presentation fluctuation | variation group).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the random time possessed by the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode group depends on whether the main game time short flag is ON / OFF and whether the table to be referred to is a normal fluctuation mode determination table or a limited frequency table Range is different, but depending on whether the gaming state is non-probability fluctuation gaming state or probability fluctuation gaming state, the fluctuation time and / or the range of random numbers possessed by the fluctuation mode group differ depending on etc. It may be configured to obtain.

  Also, in this example, in the second main game variation mode determination table, in the non-probability variation state and the non-time shortening gaming state, a specific variation mode that can be selected only when the second main game symbol is a big hit symbol. (In the present example, it is configured to have a fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time is 40 seconds). With such a configuration, when a specific effect is selected, it may be recognized by the player that the second main game symbol is a big hit symbol, so whether the specific effect is executed or not It is possible to add variety to the presentation and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, this example is only an example to the last, for example, in the non-probability fluctuation state and the non-time shortening gaming state, while the reach effect can be selected only when the second main gaming symbol is a big hit symbol, If the symbol is a lost symbol, only non-reach effects may be performed. In addition, in another gaming state (probability fluctuation state and non-time shortening gaming state or limited frequency state), a specific reach effect (or reach effect) is similarly performed only when the second main game symbol is a big hit symbol. It may be configured to be selectable.

  Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. 15, in the variation mode of the first main game side, if the result of the lottery is a loss and the determined symbol is "HA", it is referred to in the non-time shortening gaming state. Contents of the table of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table and the limited frequency table B which is referred to when the limited frequency B flag is on (in the present example, for example, when a small hit is won) (For example, the fluctuation time corresponding to the random value and the fluctuation mode group) are the same. That is, in this embodiment, on the first main game side, even if the variation pattern table is changed, if it is in the non-time shortening gaming state, it is a lost symbol (in this example, it is “HA” but The contents of the table related to the same table configuration as for “HB” (variation time corresponding to random value, variation mode group, whether variation mode depends on number of reservations, etc.) can be identical It is configured. Note that this example is merely an example, and the contents of the table relating to the lost symbol may be changed (or made identical) depending on whether or not it is the probability variation gaming state, or the second main game side A similar configuration may be provided in the variation mode.

  Also, in this example, even if the success / failure lottery result is a loss and the determination symbol is the same (“HA” or “HB”), different variation modes can be selected according to the gaming state. ing. For example, in the case of the first main game side variation mode determination table, in the case of a non-time shortening gaming state regarding the case where the success or failure lottery result is a loss and the determination symbol is "HB", the variation time is 30 seconds While only the effect that becomes the above is configured to be selected, when it is in the time shortening gaming state, the effect that the fluctuation time is 5 seconds may be selected (specifically, the non-time shortening gaming state In such a case, an effect with a shorter fluctuation time is more likely to be selected than in the case of the time-saving gaming state. Furthermore, in the case of the time reduction game state in the first main game side fluctuation mode determination table in which the success or failure lottery result is a loss and the determination symbol is "HA", it is a non-time reduction game state The variation mode, which is a variation with a short variation time (five seconds in this example), is configured to be relatively easy to be selected. In addition, this example is an example, and even when the gaming state is different, when the determined symbol is the same, the same variation mode (more specifically, for example, variation time) is configured to be selected. May be In the present embodiment, when the determined symbol is "HA", the variation mode (variation time) may differ depending on the number of reservations when the non-time shortening gaming state is in effect {variation mode (variation time) May depend on the number of reservations}. On the other hand, in the time-saving gaming state, the variation number (variation time) is not different depending on the number of reservations. Further, when the determined symbol is "HB", the variation mode (variation time) is not different depending on the number of reservations regardless of the gaming state.

  In addition, this example is only an example to the last, and in the case where the success or failure lottery result is a loss and the determined symbol is "HB", the case of probability fluctuation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state and the non probability fluctuation gaming state and non If it is in the time reduction gaming state, the selection ratio of the fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time becomes a long time (in this example, the fluctuation time is 60 seconds or more) may be different {more specifically, the probability fluctuation game In the case of the state and the non-time shortening gaming state, even if it is configured to increase or decrease the selection ratio of the fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time is relatively long (in this example, the fluctuation time is 60 seconds or more). Good. Similarly, in the case where the success or failure lottery result is a loss and the determined symbol is "HA", the probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state and the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state In addition, it is possible to change the selection ratio of the variation mode in which the variation time is short (in this example, the variation time is 20 seconds or more) {More specifically, the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state In this case, it may be configured to increase or decrease the selection ratio of the fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time is relatively short (in this example, the fluctuation time is 20 seconds or more)}.

  In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the success or failure lottery result is a loss, the determination symbol is "HA" and the non-time shortening gaming state is, the variation time in the variation mode on the first main game side Are configured to have groups that can differ depending on the number of reservations at the start of the change. Similarly, even if the determination symbol is "HA", in the variation mode of the first main game side in the case of the time shortening gaming state, the variation time (and the presentation mode regardless of the number of reservations at the time of reservation termination) ) Is configured so that it can be determined. In addition, this example is only an example to the end, and, for example, when the result of the success or failure lottery is a loss and the determined symbol is “HA” (“HB”), whether or not the gaming state (probability fluctuation state or Or regardless of whether or not it is a time saving gaming state), the fluctuation time (and effect mode) may differ depending on the number of reservations at the start of fluctuation {or in the non-time shortening gaming state, the determination of the first main gaming side When the symbol is "HB", it may be configured so that it can be determined in one fluctuation time (and presentation mode) regardless of the number of reservations at the time of reservation.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, in the case of a suspension where the stop symbol is scheduled to be “HA”, the selection tendency of the variation mode may differ depending on the number of reservations at the time of the digestion of the suspension relating to the “HA” It is comprised and it is comprised by the fluctuation mode random-number delimitation information so that there may be a case where it does not differ from the case where a fluctuation mode group differs, by the number of reservations at the time of the digestion of the reservation concerning the said HA. In addition, in the case of a suspension where the stop symbol is scheduled to be "HB", the selection tendency of the variation mode is configured so as not to be different depending on the number of reservations at the time of digestion of the suspension related to the "HB". I will supplement it.

  Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. First, in step 1552, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the main game probability change flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1570, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the time reduction number counter MP52c and determines whether the counter value is larger than 0 or not. In the case of Yes in step 1570, the specific game control means MP50 subtracts 1 from the count value of the time saving number counter MP52c in step 1572 (decrement). Next, in step 1574, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the time reduction number counter MP52c to determine whether the counter value (remaining time reduction number) is zero. If YES in step 1574, in step 1576 and step 1578, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game time short flag and the auxiliary game time short flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, Processing (processing of step 1600). Also in the case of No in step 1552, step 1570 or step 1574, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the condition determination unit MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage unit MB20b to determine whether the condition device operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1602, in step 1604, the special game control means MP30 is in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB30b, a specific game flag (main game probability change flag, main game time short flag, auxiliary game time short Turn off the flag). Next, at step 1606, the specific game control means MP50 clears the value of the time saving number counter MP52c to zero. Next, at step 1608, the specified game control means MP50 clears the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN 52c and the counter value of the limited frequency counter BMN 52c-2. Next, in step 1610, the specified game control means MP50 turns off the limit frequency A flag and the limit frequency B flag in the flag area of the limit frequency related information temporary storage means MN 52b. Next, in step 1612, the special game control means MP30 turns on the special game transition permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1614, the special game control means MP30 turns off the condition device activation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1700). Also in the case of No in step 1602, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1700).

  Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. First, in step 1702, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether the special game transition permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1702, in step 1704 and step 1706, the special game execution means MP33 turns the special game transition permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and turns off the special game execution flag Turn on. Next, in step 1707, the special game execution means MP33 sets an initial value (1 in this example) to the round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1708, the special game execution means MP33 sets a command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting information (special game start display instruction command) to the effect of starting a special game to the sub main control unit ( In the control command transmission process of step 1999, the sub main control unit SM side is transmitted), and the process proceeds to step 1712.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1702, in step 1710, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether the special game execution flag is on. Then, in the case of Yes in step 1710, the process proceeds to step 1712. In the case of No in step 1710, the special game execution means MP33 determines that the permission for the special game is not received, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1800).

  Next, in step 1712, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, immediately before the start of each round. Determine if there is. In the case of Yes in step 1712, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first, in step 1714, the special game execution means MP33 opens the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b to the open pattern (for example, the main game symbol is stopped) If the symbol is 3A, 3B or 4B, the opening pattern "0.2 seconds open → 1.0 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → closed", the stop symbol of the main game symbol is 4A, 5A, 7A, 9A, In the case of 5B or 7B, an open pattern of “29.0 seconds open → close” is set. Next, in step 1716, the special game execution means MP33 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1718, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1720, the special game execution means MP33 drives the first big winning opening electric combination C11d (or the second large winning opening electric combination C21d) of the first large winning opening C10 to make a first large winning combination. The mouth C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) is opened, a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) is set to the special game timer MP34t (especially the opening time timer), and the process is shifted to step 1722. On the other hand, if No in step 1712, that is, if the special winning opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1722 without performing the processing of steps 1714 to 1720.

  Next, in step 1722, the special game execution means MP33 transmits the game state command (for example, the current number of rounds, the number of winning game balls, etc.) related to the current special game to the sub main control unit SM side. The command transmission buffer MT10 for the command is set (sent to the sub main control unit SM side in the control command transmission processing of step 1999). Next, in step 1724, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and the predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) in the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening C20) in the round. It is determined whether or not there is a winning ball of). In the case of Yes in step 1724, the process proceeds to step 1728. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1724, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game timer MP34t (in particular, the open time timer) in step 1726 for a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) related to opening the special winning opening. It is determined whether it has elapsed. Also in the case of Yes in step 1726, the process proceeds to step 1728. In the case of No at step 1726, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1800).

  Next, in step 1728, the special game execution means MP33 is the first large winning opening electric combination C11d of the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening electric combination C21 d of the second large winning opening C20) The driving is stopped and the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) is closed. Next, in step 1730, the special game execution means MP33 resets the special game timer MP34t (in particular, the open time timer). Next, in step 1732, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1733, special game execution means MP33 adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) in special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1734, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and whether or not the final round is over (for example, the round number counter in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b It is determined whether the counter value (not shown) exceeds the maximum number of rounds). In the case of Yes in step 1734, in step 1736, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1738, the special game execution means MP33 sets the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting information (special game end display instruction command) to the effect of ending the special game to the sub main control unit SM side. (The control command transmission processing in step 1999 is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side). Then, in step 1750, the specific game control means MP50 executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game described later, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1800). Also in the case of No at step 1734, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1800).

  Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 in FIG. First, in step 1752, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol is a probability change big hit symbol (probability fluctuation gaming state after the end of special game execution) It is a jackpot symbol to shift, and in this example, it is determined whether or not 3A, 5A, 7A, 9A, 3B, 5B, 7B). If Yes in step 1752, in step 1754, the specified game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specified game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and shifts to step 1756. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1752, ie, the stop symbol is a big hit symbol which does not shift to the probability variation gaming state after the termination of the special game, the step also in the case of 4A · 4B). Migrate to 1756.

  Next, in step 1756, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol is a probability change / time / short / big hit symbol (probability fluctuation after the end of the special game execution) It is a jackpot symbol to shift to the gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 5A, 7A, 9A, 3B, 5B, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1756, in step 1758, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol is the awakening stage probability variation, hour and day large hit symbol (this example Then, it is determined whether or not 5A · 3B). It should be noted that the awakening stage probability variation / time junior high hit pattern is an awakening stage (a staying stage, which can inform the player at the time of the end of the stage whether or not it is a probability fluctuation gaming state) after the big hit ends. It is a big hit design to shift to. In the case of Yes in step 1758, in step 1760, the specified game control means MP50 sets the limited frequency counter AMN 52 a predetermined number of times (60 times in this example). Next, in step 1762, the specific game control means MP 50 turns on the limit frequency A flag in the flag area of the limit frequency related information temporary storage means MN 52 b. Next, in step 1764, the specific game control means MP50 sets the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM an awakening stage shift command (a command relating to information to the effect of transitioning to the awakening stage). (Sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1778. Also in the case of No at step 1758, the process proceeds to step 1778.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1756 (that is, in the present example, when the stop symbol is any of 3A, 4A and 4B), in step 1766, the specified game control means MP50 is the first and second main game symbols The stop symbol refers to the information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol is a big hit symbol that shifts to a non probability changing gaming state and a time shortening gaming state after the end of the special game execution. • Determine if it is 4B). In the case of Yes in step 1766, in step 1768, the specific game control means MP50 sets the count value of the time reduction counter MP52c to the number of time reductions based on the big hit symbol (the time delay may differ depending on the type of big hit symbol) For example, when the stop symbol 4A is further subdivided into 4A-1 and 4B-1, the case of 4A-1 or 4B-1 is 20 times, and the case of 4A-2 or 4B-2 The number of times is 60 times, etc.) Thus, in this example, 4A-1 (4B-1) whose time reduction number is 20 times and 4A-2 whose time reduction number is 60 times in the big hit design belonging to 4A design (4B design) 4A-2), and the type of jackpot symbol and the type of time-savings are not limited thereto, and other time-savings (for example, time-savings of 40 times) 4A- 3 (4B-3) may be further provided, and 4A-1 and 4A-2 (4B-1 and 4B-2) in the illustrated number of times in the respective big hit symbols or in the 4A symbol (4B symbol) The ratio of) can be changed as appropriate. Next, in step 1770, the specific game control means MP50 sets the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN 52c to the same value (20 times or 60 times) as the time reduction number set in the counter value of the time reduction number counter MP52c. Next, in step 1772, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the limit frequency A flag in the flag area of the limit frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. Next, in step 1774, the specified game control means MP50 sets the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the awakening stage transition command and the command related to the count value of the limited frequency counter AMN 52c to the sub main control unit SM (step It is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1778. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1766 {ie, in the case where the stop symbol is the latent probability variation big hit symbol (3A in this example)}, in step 1776, the specified game control means MP50 is the specified game related information temporary storage means MB30b. With reference to the flag area, it is determined whether or not at least one of the main game probability change flag and the main game time short flag is on at the time of the big hit. If Yes in step 1776, the process proceeds to step 1778.

  Next, in steps 1778 and 1780, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time short flag and the auxiliary game time short flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and performs the next process (step Move to process 1800).

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1776 {ie, when the main game probability change flag and the main game time short flag are off (normal game state)}, at step 1782, the specified game control means MP50 is a demon stage shift command (devil stage Command in the command transmission buffer for sending to the sub main control unit SM (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command sending processing of step 1999) , Shift to the next processing (processing of step 1800). It should be noted that after the end of the special game according to the "3A" symbol won in the normal gaming state, it shifts to the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, and after the small hitting game ended in the normal gaming state, the normal gaming state It remains as it is, and it is comprised so that the substantially same presentation may be performed in any case. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to determine whether the special game (small hit game) pertaining to either the "3 A" symbol or the small hit symbol is executed (so-called creation of a latent state), and the fun of the game is It will be improved.

  Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart of small hit game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1800 in FIG. First, at step 1802, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b and determines whether the small hit flag is on. If Yes in step 1802, the small hit game control means MP40 turns off the small hit flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b in step 1804. Next, in step 1806, the small hit game control means MP40 opens the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b in the opening pattern (in this example, the first big prize similar to the time of execution of the special game pertaining to the latent probability change big hit symbol The opening and closing pattern of the mouth C10 is set, for example, 0.2 seconds open → 1.0 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → closed). Next, in step 1808, the small hit game control means MP40 turns on the small hit execution flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b. Next, in step 1810, the small hit game control means MP40 opens the first large winning opening C10 and starts the small hit game timer MP41t (the timer value is counted down). Next, in step 1811, the small hit game control means MP40 is a special game start display instruction command (a command to the sub side, and in this example, the effect mode during the small hit game relates to the latent probability change big hit symbol special Since it is the same as the effect mode in the game, it is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM side the same command as in the case of the latent probability variation big hit symbol (step) The control command is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side in the control command transmission processing of 1999, and the process proceeds to step 1812. In the present embodiment, when the small hit or latent probability change big hit is won in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (normal gaming state), the opening of the first large winning opening C10 in the small hitting game The mode and the effect mode are the same as in the special game related to the latent probability variation big hit symbol, and the stay stage to be executed after the end of the special game according to the latent probability variation big hit symbol after the small hit game is also the same. It becomes difficult for the player to determine whether a special game (or small hit game) pertaining to any big hit symbol with the hit symbol and the latent probability variation big hit symbol has been executed (creates a so-called latent state), improving the interest of the game It will be

  On the other hand, if No in step 1802, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40 b in step 1811 and determines whether the small hit execution flag is on or not. Do. In the case of Yes in step 1811, the process moves to step 1812.

  Next, in step 1812, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the first large winning opening winning combination detection device C11s and determines whether or not there is a winning (entering) in the first large winning opening C10. If Yes in step 1812, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40 b in step 1814, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are held in the first big winning opening C10. It is determined whether there was a In the case of Yes at step 1814, the process goes to step 1818. On the other hand, if No in step 1812 or step 1814, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the small hit game timer MP41t in step 1816 for a predetermined time (for example, 0 in this example) related to opening of the big winning opening. .2 It is determined whether or not 2 seconds open → 1.0 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → 1.4 seconds involved in closing). If Yes in step 1816, then the process moves to step 1818.

  Next, in step 1818, the small hit game control means MP40 stops driving the first large winning opening electric combination C11d, and closes the first large winning opening C10. Next, in step 1820, the small hit game control means MP40 stops and resets the small hit game timer MP41t. Next, in step 1822, the small hit game control means MP40 turns off the small hit execution flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b. Next, at step 1823, the small hit game control means MP40 is a command to the special game end display instruction command (a command to the sub side, and in this example, the effect mode during the small hit game is a special according to the latent probability change big hit symbol Since it is the same as the effect mode in the game, it is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM side the same command as in the case of the latent probability variation big hit symbol (step) In the control command transmission processing of 1999, the sub main control unit SM side is transmitted), and the process shifts to step 1824.

  Next, in step 1824, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the main game probability change flag and the main game time short flag are off (normal game state) or not. Determine if If Yes in step 1824, the small hitting game control means MP40 turns on the limit frequency B flag in the flag area of the limit frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b in step 1826. Next, at step 1828, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b, and the stopped main game symbol is the short hit small hit pattern {in this example, 1K, It is determined whether or not the number of times of fluctuation at which the limited frequency table is referred to after the small hitting game ends is smaller than the long number of small hitting symbols (2K). In the case of Yes in step 1828, the small hit game control means MP40 sets the short frequency counter (10 times) in the limited frequency counter BMN 52c-2 in step 1830, and proceeds to step 1834. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1828, the small hit game control means MP40 sets the number of long times (30 times) to the limited frequency counter BMN 52c-2 at step 1832, and shifts to step 1834. Next, in step 1834, the small hit game control means MP40 transmits a command (command to the sub side) related to the devil stage shift command and the counter value of the limited frequency counter BMN 52c-2 to the sub main control unit SM side The command transmission buffer MT10 for the command is set (sent to the sub main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to the next process (1997 process of step). Also in the case of No at step 1811, step 1816 or step 1824, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1997). In the present embodiment, the large winning opening to be opened during the small hitting game is the first large winning opening C10, but it is not limited to this, the large winning opening to be opened during the small hitting game is 2 big winning opening C20 may also be, if configured as such, the special winning opening opened during the execution of the special game pertaining to the latent probability variation big hit symbol (in this example, 3A) is also the second large winning opening C20 Is preferred.

  Next, control processing executed on the side of the sub main control unit SM will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 23 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (in particular, the sub main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 5D is a process on the side of the sub main control unit SM which is executed after resetting such as when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. That is, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, in step 2002, the sub main control unit SM executes an initial process based on the information received from the main side (the main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear information When received → Initialize the sub-side RAM, when various information commands are received → Resetting related information at power-off to the sub-side RAM). Next, in step 2003, the sub main control unit SM indicates that the trigger is on hold (the on-off winning prize lottery) from the information on the on hold temporarily stored in the drawing on hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Delete the information (If there is no hold in the hold with the information that the trigger is hold, this process is not executed and it shifts to the next process), and all the display modes are "white" Display (Reset the processing related to the pre-reading effect). The processing at the time of power interruption is not limited to this, and even after return of power interruption, it is possible to continue the pre-reading effect without deleting the information indicating that the trigger is on hold or the information related to the on hold display mode. You may In such a configuration, for example, a save area where information can be maintained even during power failure is provided on the sub side, and information related to effects is backed up to the save area when a power failure occurs, and power failure recovery It may be configured to restore information backed up from time to time. In addition, it is configured to receive information related to the content of the hold from the main side again at the time of power failure recovery, at the start of fluctuation, at the time of fluctuation stop, and at the time of hold occurrence (also regarding hold other than the hold newly generated). Although it is preferable {not shown in this example, the main side transmits only the information related to the number of reservations (the information related to the content of the suspension is not transmitted) at the time of power failure recovery. . Therefore, the information related to the hold existing at the time of the power interruption does not exist after the restoration of the power interruption, so that the pre-reading effect can not be executed for the holding (note that the main side holds the hold Information to be received, and may be configured to be able to execute pre-reading effect for the hold). It should be noted that if a power failure occurs while the decorative symbol is fluctuating, if it does not have the function to maintain the information at the time of the power failure, it will turn dark until the end command of the fluctuation is received from the main side A screen (for example, a screen displaying "under preparation" etc.) will be displayed}. Thereafter, the process shifts to loop processing in which (b), which is the repetitive processing routine of the sub main control unit SM, is repeatedly executed. Here, when (b) is executed, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM first performs a hold information management process described later in step 2100 as shown in the process of FIG. Run. Next, in step 2300, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 2400, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decoration symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 2500, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes special game related display control processing described later. Next, in step 2600, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a stay stage determination process described later. Next, in step 2999, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes display command transmission control processing (sends the command set by these series of subroutines to the sub sub control unit SS side), End the repeat processing routine.

  As described above, the sub main control unit SM employs a mode in which the sub main routine (S2100 to S2999) is loop-processed after being reset. Further, the process of FIG. 6C is an interrupt process of the sub main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line in the main control board M described above is one terminal of the CPU of the sub main control unit SM (in this example , NMI terminal) is the processing flow (c) when it is connected. That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the sub main control unit SM receives a command input port from the main control board M side ( Check the input port of the data signal line mentioned above. Then, at step 2006, based on the check result, the sub main control unit SM sends a command sent from the main control board M to the RAM on the sub main control unit SM side (for example, main side information temporary storage means SM11 b). Are temporarily stored, and the process returns to the process that was being performed immediately before this interrupt process.

  Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and a command relating to the new hold generation from the main control board M side (first main game symbol or second main It is determined whether or not hold information pertaining to the game symbol has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 is a drawing hold counter in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22 b (in this example, a maximum of four for the first main game, A maximum of four for the second main game is added "1". Next, in step 2106, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 temporarily sends a command concerning the new hold success / failure result and stop symbol information transmitted from the main control board M side to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22 b. Remember. Next, in step 2108, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 generates hold information (in particular, fluctuation mode group, fluctuation mode random number division information, etc.) based on the hold generation command transmitted from the main control board M side. , Temporarily storing in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. In the case where the information concerning the stop result, the variation pattern group and the variation pattern random number division information is not transmitted from the main side, the information is stored in the temporary storage information temporary storage area in step 2106 or step 2108. Will not be stored temporarily. Next, in step 2110, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether the new hold is a hold on the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2110, in step 2150, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 executes a first main game winning time prefetching determination process described later, and proceeds to step 2112. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2110, the coating material suspension information display control means SM22 executes, at step 2200, prefetching determination processing at the time of second main game winning, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2112.

  Next, at step 2112, the drawing hold information display control means SM 22 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM 22 b and determines whether the information indicates that the new hold is a trigger hold. Do. If Yes in step 2112, in step 2250, the drawing hold information display control means SM 22 executes prefetch holding content determination processing described later, and proceeds to step 2114. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2112, the processing shifts to step 2114.

  Next, in step 2114, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines the hold display mode of the hold other than the trigger hold (all the hold if there is no trigger hold in the hold) as "white". As described above, in the present embodiment, the hold display mode in which the hold display mode does not change due to the hold change effect is configured to be “white”. Next, in step 2116, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays a hold change effect (hold display mode changes) for hold other than trigger hold (all hold if there is no trigger hold in hold). Determine the effect to be performed to "None". As described above, in the present embodiment, the on-hold change effect relating to on-hold in which the on-hold display mode does not change due to on-hold change effect becomes “none” ) Is configured. Next, in step 3050, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 executes an on-occurrence hold content transmission process to be described later, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2300).

  On the other hand, if No in step 2102, in step 2118, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and receives a symbol variation display start instruction command from the main control board M It is determined whether or not. If Yes in step 2118, in step 2120, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 subtracts “1” from the drawing hold counter in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22 b. Next, in step 2122, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 holds information relating to the symbol change (in particular, the result of the pass / fail, stop symbol information, the fluctuation mode group and the fluctuation mode random number division information) The temporary storage means SM22b is deleted and the remaining reserve information is shifted. Next, in step 2124, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 turns on the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 3100. Next, in step 3100, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 executes a process for transmitting pending content, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2300).

  Also in the case of No at step 2118, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300).

  Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the first main game winning prediction process according to the subroutine of step 2150 in FIG. The present processing is divided into two, processing pertaining to the prohibition condition of the pre-reading lottery and processing pertaining to the pre-drawing lottery. In the prohibition process of the former prefetch lottery, first, in step 2152, the reserve prefetch effect executability judging means SM26k refers to the drawing reserve information temporary storage means SM22b, and the second main game hold (the first main game hold) It is determined whether or not there is a hold) which is prioritized prior to the game player. In the case of Yes in step 2152, in step 2154, the reserve pre-reading effect executability determination means SM 26k refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11 b and determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time shortening gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2154, in step 2158, pending pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k refers to the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22 b and there is a pending with information indicating that the trigger is pending within pending. It is determined whether there is any. Here, the trigger hold is a hold that has been won in the prize pre-selection lottery (the first main game prize pre-selection lottery, the second main game pre-selection lottery). In the case of Yes in step 2158, in step 2160, the reserve pre-reading effect executability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing reserve information temporary storage means SM22 b, and whether or not there is a pending big hit in the pending before the new pending Determine if In the case of Yes in step 2160, the process moves to step 2162.

  Next, in the processing relating to the latter pre-reading lottery, first, in step 2162, the pending pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k refers to the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22 b and the new pending becomes a big hit pending It is determined whether the In the case of Yes in step 2162, in step 2164, the reserve pre-reading effect executability judging means SM 26k executes a prize-prediction lottery at the time of winning with a predetermined probability (1/3 in this example) with respect to the new reserve. It transfers to step 2174. On the other hand, if No in step 2162, in step 2166 the reserve pre-reading effect executability decision means SM26k refers to the drawing reserve information temporary storage means SM22 b, and does the stop symbol relating to the new reserve be "HA"? It is determined whether or not. If the result of step 2166 is YES, then, in step 2168, pending pre-reading effect executability determination means SM26k refers to drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22 b and determines whether the new pending change mode group is group 3 or not. judge. As described above, in the present embodiment, when determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading lottery, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading lottery in consideration of the variation mode group. In addition, when determining whether or not execution of the prefetch lottery is performed, it may be configured to determine whether or not the execution of the prefetch lottery is performed in consideration of the variation mode random number delimiter information. In the case of Yes in step 2168, in step 2170, the reserve pre-reading effect executability judging means SM 26k executes a prize-prediction lottery at the time of winning with a predetermined probability (1/10 in this example) with respect to the new reserve It transfers to step 2174. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2166 (ie, when the stop symbol pertaining to the new hold is "HB"), at step 2172 the pending pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k is predetermined for the new hold. The winning pre-selection lottery to be won with probability (1/3 in this example) is executed, and the process shifts to step 2174. As described above, in the present embodiment, the case where the stop symbol relating to the first main game is "HB" is configured to be easier to win the prefetch lottery than when the stop symbol relating to the first main game is "HA".

  Next, at step 2174, the reserve prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM 26k determines whether or not the winning at time lottery bonus lottery is won. In the case of Yes in step 2174, in step 2176, pending pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k is “trigger pending” in the new pending winning in the prize pre-reading lottery in the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22 b. Information to the effect is added and temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2112).

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2152 (when the second main game hold exists in hold), at step 2178 the hold prefetching effect executability judging means SM26k temporarily displays in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Delete the information to the effect that it is "trigger pending" from the information related to the stored pending (If there is no pending with the information that the trigger is pending, this process is not executed, and the next process is not performed. To the next processing (processing of step 2112). Also in the case of No at Step 2154, Step 2158, Step 2160, or Step 2174, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of Step 2112). In the process of step 2178, when a hold on the second main game side exists (is generated), in the gaming machine of the second main game side preferential digest like the present embodiment, the newly generated second main game side In order to settle the game side's suspension first, it is a configuration for avoiding a situation in which the scheduled change order is not made and the preread effect over plural changes is not executed normally. In addition, as a prohibition condition of the pre-reading lottery, a condition as to whether or not there is a suspension of a specific variation mode group (or a suspension of specific variation mode random number delimiter information) in the suspension before the new suspension as a suspension condition It is also good. In this example, when executing the first main game side prefetching effect, there is no hold of the second main game side and the non-time shortening game state (opening time extension function non-operation) In the non-time shortening game state (during open time extension function being activated), the game is mainly made to progress on the first main game side.

  Next, FIG. 26 is a flow chart of the second main game winning combination prefetching determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. The present processing is divided into two, processing pertaining to the prohibition condition of the pre-reading lottery and processing pertaining to the pre-drawing lottery. In the prohibition process of the former pre-reading lottery, first, at step 2202, the pending pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11 b and the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state or not Determine if In the case of Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the pending pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k refers to the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and there is a pending with information indicating that the trigger is on pending in pending. It is determined whether there is any. In the case of Yes in step 2204, in step 2206, pending pre-reading effect executability determination means SM26k refers to drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22 b, and there is no pending which is a big hit in pending before the new pending. Determine if If Yes in step 2206, then the process moves to step 2208.

  Next, in the process relating to the latter pre-reading lottery, at first, in step 2208, the pre-pending rendering effect executability judging means SM26k refers to the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22 b and the new pending becomes a big hit pending It is determined whether the In the case of Yes in step 2208, in step 2210, the reserve pre-reading effect executability judging means SM 26k executes a prize-prediction lottery at the time of winning with a predetermined probability (1/3 in this example) with respect to the new reserve Transfer to step 2220. On the other hand, if the result of step 2208 is No, in step 2212 the reserve prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the drawing reserve information temporary storage means SM22b, and whether the new mode of change variation group is group C or not. Determine if In the case of Yes in step 2212, in step 2216, the reserve pre-reading effect executability judging means SM 26k executes a prize-reading advance lottery at the time of winning with a predetermined probability (1/5 in this example) for the new reserve. Transfer to step 2220. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2212, the process proceeds to step 2220.

  Next, at step 2220, the pre-holding effect executability judging means SM 26k judges whether or not the winning pre-selection lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2220, in step 2222, the reserve pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k is “trigger pending” in the new hold winning the prize pre-reading lottery in the drawing reserve information temporary storage means SM22 b. Information to the effect is added and temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2112). Also in the case of No in step 2202, step 2204, step 2206 or step 2220, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2112). As described above, in the present embodiment, in the time-saving gaming state, the second main game side can be won in the first lottery, while the first main game side is not elected in the second lottery. In the reduced game state, the first main game side can be elected to be a lottery lottery while the second main game side is not to be elected to be a lottery lottery. In addition, it is not limited to this, in the state where the open time of the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d is relatively extended (the open time extension function is in operation), the second main game In the state where it is possible to win the side pre-reading lottery, while not winning in the first main game side pre-reading lottery, the opening time of the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d is not relatively extended (opening time extension function In the state in which is not activated), it may be configured such that the first main lottery side lottery may be won while the second main gaming side is not winning. In the following description, when the configuration is different from the time-saving gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, the open time extension function is operating and the open time extension function is operating. There is no problem even if it replaces with the structure which becomes a different effect | action with a non-state. In this example, as described above, when executing the first main game side prefetching effect, there is no hold of the second main game side and the non-time shortening game state (the open time extension function is not It is a condition that it is an operation), and in the non-time shortening game state (opening time extension function non-operation), it is mainly configured to advance the game on the first main game side. In addition, when executing the preview effect on the second main game side, it is a condition that it is a time reduction game state (during open time extension function operation), and a time reduction game state (open time extension function In operation, the second main game side is mainly configured to advance the game. Since it is comprised in this way, when comparing the pre-reading effect in time shortening gaming state (during opening time extension function operation) and the pre-reading effect in non-time shortening gaming state (opening time extension function operation), time is The second main game side of pre-reading effect (or matters related to pre-reading such as pre-drawing lottery) in the shortening game state (during opening time extension function operation) and the first main game in the non-time shortening game state (opening time extension function operation) It may be compared with the side pre-reading effect (or matters related to pre-reading such as pre-drawing lottery).

  Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the prefetch holding content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2250 in FIG. First, at step 2252, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the trigger hold is a big hit hold. If Yes in step 2252, in step 2254, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines the display mode of trigger hold with reference to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of big hit). Next, in step 2256, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 holds a hold change effect for trigger hold (effect to be executed when the hold display mode for trigger hold changes from "white") to a hold change effect determination table It determines with reference to (big hit) and proceeds to step 2262.

  On the other hand, if the result of step 2252 is NO, the display mode of trigger hold is determined in step 2258 with reference to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of losing). Next, in step 2260, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 holds a hold change effect for trigger hold (effect to be executed when the hold display mode for trigger hold changes from "white") to a hold change effect determination table It determines with reference to (when lost) and proceeds to step 2262. Next, in step 2262, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 determines holding change effect execution variation (pattern change that will cause holding change effect to be executed), and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 2114) Transition. As described above, in the present embodiment, the on-hold change effect execution variation in which on-hold change effect relating to trigger on-hold is to be executed becomes the symbol variation on on-hold of any of on-hold currently occurring It is configured as follows.

  Here, the upper two tables of the four tables in the lower part of the figure are a pending display mode determination table (at the time of big hit) and a pending display mode determination table (at the time of losing). In the present embodiment, the type of display mode that can be selected when determining the display mode of trigger hold that can change when holding change effect execution is performed with reference to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of big hit) is “rainbow color”. , "Red", "green" and "blue", and the types of display modes that can be selected when determining with reference to the hold display mode determination table (when lost) are "red", "green" It is three by "blue", and it is drawn by random numbers for exclusive use at the time of pending display mode decision. "Red" is most easily selected when referring to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of big hit), and "blue" is most easily selected when referring to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of losing) The degree of big hit expectation for each display mode of hold when hold change effect occurs (proportion of the appearance rate of change that is a big hit to the appearance rate of the sum of the change that is a big hit and the change that is a loss) "Color" is selected only at the time of big hit, and in the color excluding "rainbow color", the one with high expectation of big hit is in the order of "red", "green", and "blue". The display mode that can be changed is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the color is changed even if the type is increased or decreased, for example, when the open extension function is not activated than when the open time extension function is activated. The type of the hold display mode may be configured to be larger (or in the non-probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state than in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state). The configuration is merely an example, and there is no problem in changing the selection ratio of the hold display mode, for example, “red: blue” = “300: 324” in the hold display mode determination table (at the time of big hit) In the reserve display mode determination table (at the time of losing), "blue" is easier to select than "red" regardless of the result such as "red: blue" = "100: 624", but at the time of big hit The difference at the time of loss may be configured such that the difference at the time of loss may be larger between the difference in the selection rate at the time of loss display and the difference in the selection rate at the time of loss display. Moreover, in this example, although it was comprised so that the symbol fluctuation | variation which concerns on trigger hold could show the expectation which will be a big hit by the display color of hold, it is not limited to this, For example, It may be configured to be able to indicate the gaming state after the special game is executed (in combination with the jackpot expectation). When configured as such, in particular, during the probability variation gaming state, by the display color of the suspension, suggesting the degree of expectation to shift to the probability variation gaming state after the special game is executed in the case of a big hit in the suspension (For example, if the reserve display color is “red”, the probability change expectation is high, if “blue” the probability change expectation is low, etc.), does the probability fluctuation gaming state advantageous to the player continue? It is possible to execute an effective presentation asking if it will end.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, at the time of executing the hold change presentation, the jackpot expectation may be different depending on the display mode selected from the plurality of display modes of the hold. In addition, it may be configured to be able to execute a plurality of hold change effects during execution of the pre-reading effect (from the timing when the pre-reading lottery is won to the end of fluctuation of the main game symbol related to trigger hold). When configured in this way, for example, when the hold change effect is executed twice during the pre-reading effect, if the display mode of the hold that changes in the first hold change effect is "blue", The display mode of the hold changing in the second hold change effect is set to “green” or “red”, that is, changes to the display mode with a high expectation of the big hit expectancy every time the hold change effect is executed It is desirable to configure to (rank up) (in order not to impair the player's sense of expectation). In addition, the effect relating to the pending display change is not limited to this, and as a result, a presentation mode without accompanying the pending display change may be provided. For example, the pending may shake at the start of fluctuation (or upon pending withdrawal). An effect may be provided, and an effect aspect (so-called, cassette pattern) in which the hold display does not change as it is may be provided, and an effect mode in which the hold display change is subsequently executed.

  Next, the lower two tables of the four tables in the lower part of the figure are the hold change effect determination table (at the time of big hit) and the hold change effect determination table (at the time of losing). In this embodiment, the types of effect modes that can be selected in the case of determining the effect mode of the hold change effect with reference to the hold change effect determination table (at the big hit) or the hold change effect determination table (at the loss) are “ The cut-in hold change, the weak-serif hold change, the middle-serif hold change, and the strong-serif hold change are randomly selected by random numbers dedicated to the hold change effect determination. In addition, the big hit expectation degree (the ratio of the appearance ratio of the big hit fluctuation to the total appearance rate of the fluctuation that becomes the big hit and the fluctuation that becomes the loss) corresponding to the hold corresponding to the hold change presentation when the hold change presentation occurs Is configured to be able to differ by the pending change effect that occurs, from the big change expectation with high hitting change effect "cut in hold change", "strong serif hold change", "medium serif hold change", "weak serif hold" The order is "change". The effect mode of the pending change presentation that can be executed is merely an example, and there is no problem in changing the color that can change even if the type is increased or decreased. Moreover, in this example, although it was comprised so that the symbol change which concerns on trigger hold could show the expectation which will be a big hit by the production | presentation aspect of a hold | maintenance change production, it is not limited to this, For example, Or, it may be configured to be able to indicate the gaming state after the special game is executed (in combination with the jackpot expectation). In addition, although it was comprised so that the big hit expectation concerning the hold corresponding to the said hold change production may differ by the hold change production being different in the same figure, it is not limited to this, and hold change production is different May be configured so that the suspension change expectation degree of suspension corresponding to the suspension change presentation may be different (for example, when the “cut-in suspension change presentation” occurs, the suspension display mode with a probability of 100%) Changes, and when the "weak serif holding change effect" occurs, the holding display mode changes with a probability of 20%, etc.).

  Next, FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the pending content transmission process according to the subroutine of step 3050 in FIG. First, in step 3052, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 sets the suspension display mode of the first or second digesting order among the suspension on the first main game side (a command is transmitted to the sub sub control unit SS Will be Next, in step 3054, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets the hold display mode of the third to fourth digesting order among the hold on the first main game side (a command is transmitted to the sub sub control unit SS Would be Next, in step 3056, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets the hold display mode of the first or second digesting order among the holds on the second main game side (a command is transmitted to the sub sub control unit SS Would be Next, in step 3058, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 sets the suspension display mode of the third to fourth digesting order among the suspension on the second main game side (a command is transmitted to the sub sub control unit SS Would be As described above, in the present embodiment, the command relating to the suspension display mode to be transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS is set in four times, and the “first main game suspension of first to second digest order → first First main game hold order of 3rd to 4th digest order → 2nd main game hold order of 1st to 2nd digest order → 2nd main game hold order of 3rd to 4th digest order It is configured. The order for setting the hold display mode to be transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS may be changed, for example, “the second main game hold first to second digest order → second main game hold 3 The fourth digest order → the first and second digest order of the first main game hold → the third and fourth digest order of the first main game hold may be configured as follows. By configuring in such a manner, in the gaming machine in which the second main game side hold is prioritized over the first main game side hold, the command relating to the hold display mode of the hold to be prioritized is displayed. It can be configured to set in advance. In addition, the information which concerns on a pending | holding display position is also contained in the information which concerns on the said pending | holding display aspect, By comprising in this way, a display position changes even if it is the same pending | holding by being suspended It is also possible to properly display the hold when it is In addition, when there is no corresponding hold (for example, when setting the command according to the hold display mode of the hold of the third digestion order pertaining to the first main game side, only one hold is for the first main game side) If not occurred, etc.), the information relating to the hold display mode is not transmitted to the sub-sub control unit. The present invention is not limited to this, and when there is no corresponding hold, it may be configured to transmit information to the effect that it does not correspond (information indicating that there is no hold display mode) to the sub-sub side.

  Next, in step 3060, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets the first main game hold number and the second main game hold number (a command will be sent to the sub-sub control unit SS), step 2250. The suspension display based on the suspension display mode determined in step 2114 is set (a command will be transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300).

  Next, FIG. 29 is a flow chart of the process of transmitting a content at the time of reservation according to the subroutine of step 3100 in FIG. First, in step 3102, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets the hold change effect of the hold on the first main game side (a command will be transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS) (step 2250 and step The hold change effect determined in 2116 is set). Next, in step 3104, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets the hold display mode of the first or second digesting order among the first main game side hold (a command is transmitted to the sub sub control unit SS Would be Next, in step 3106, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 sets the suspension display mode of the third to fourth digesting order among the suspension on the first main game side (a command is transmitted to the sub sub control unit SS Would be Next, in step 3108, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets the hold change effect for holding on the second main game side (a command will be sent to the sub-sub control unit SS) (step 2250 and The hold change presentation determined in step 2116 is set). Next, in step 3110, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets the hold display mode of the first or second digesting order among the holds on the second main game side (a command is transmitted to the sub sub control unit SS Would be Next, in step 3112, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 sets the suspension display mode of the third to fourth digestion order of the suspension on the second main game side (sent to the sub sub control unit SS It becomes). As described above, in the present embodiment, the display mode to be transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS is divided into four times and set. It is configured to be set in the order of “3 to 4 digestion order of the hold → 1 to 2 digestion order of the 2nd main game reserve → the 3 to 4 digestion order of the 2nd main game reserve” There is. Note that the order of setting the commands relating to the hold display mode to be transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS may be changed in the same manner as in the case of the hold content transmission process described above. Digest order of 1 to 2 → 2 to 4 of the second main game hold → 2 to 4 of first main game hold → 3 to 4 first main game hold It may be configured as "order of eye digestion". By configuring in such a manner, in the gaming machine in which the second main game side hold is prioritized over the first main game side hold, the command relating to the hold display mode of the hold to be prioritized is displayed. It can be configured to set in advance. In addition, the information which concerns on a pending | holding display position is also contained in the information which concerns on the said pending | holding display aspect, A display position changes even if it is the same pending | holding by being comprised like this by a pending | holding being digested. It is also possible to properly display the hold when it is In addition, when there is no corresponding hold (for example, when setting the hold display mode of the hold of the third digest order pertaining to the first main game side, only one hold of the first main game side is occurring) If not, etc.), the information relating to the hold display mode is not transmitted to the sub-sub control unit. The present invention is not limited to this, and when there is no corresponding hold, it may be configured to transmit information to the effect that it does not correspond (information indicating that there is no hold display mode) to the sub-sub side.

  Next, in step 3114, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets the first main game hold number and the second main game hold number (a command will be sent to the sub-sub control unit SS), step 2250. The suspension display based on the suspension display mode determined in step 2114 is set (a command will be transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). As described above, in the process of sending reserve content at the time of the reserve process, in addition to the process of sending pending content to be performed at the hold occurrence, a command relating to the hold change effect is set. The process is executed (the process of setting the hold change presentation is not performed at the hold occurrence).

  Further, in the present embodiment, at the time of the end of the hold, the command relating to the hold change effect on the first main game side and the command relating to the hold change effect on the second main game side are set The command to be set also includes a command indicating no action (used at the time of a transmission error of the command, or at the time of a hold interrupt of the second main game player). In addition, it is also configured to set a command relating to the first main game holding number and the second main game holding number, and the command is set at the time of occurrence of holding and at the time of digestion. Also, the hold display mode of the hold on the first main game side and the hold on the second main game side is also set to be set at the hold occurrence time and at the digestion time, and the reserve display position changes at the hold digestion time. A command corresponding to the later pending display position is set (a command indicating no action as described above also exists in the command).

  Next, FIG. 30 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, in step 2302, the figure display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the figure display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. If the result of step 2302 is YES, in step 2304, the figure display content determination means SM21 n turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the figure display related information temporary storage means SM21 b. Next, in step 2306, the drawing display content determination means SM21n (and the notice effect display content determination means SM24n, the reach effect display content determination means SM25n) is the symbol information (temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b). With reference to the stop symbol / variation mode pertaining to the main game symbol and the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21ta, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol {eg, when the stop symbol pertaining to the main game symbol is a big hit symbol "Zorro eyes such as" 7 · 7 · 7 ", lost pattern, if the" 1 · · · 5 etc barak eyes "and fluctuation mode {eg, the fluctuation mode according to the main game pattern is a short time If it is fluctuation, it is non-reach, if it is fluctuation for a long time, normal reach or super reach etc.} is decided, drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and notice effect related Distribution temporary storage unit SM24b, transmits the information relating to the stop symbols and variable aspects of decorative symbols and the determined stores temporarily reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b) the sub-sub-control unit SS. Next, in step 3150, the figure display content determination means SM21n executes the variation suggestion display mode management process described later. Next, in step 2308, the figure display content determination means SM21 n turns on the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the figure display related information temporary storage means SM21 b, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2400). Transition. Also in the case of No in step 2302, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2400). As described above, in the present embodiment, the information regarding the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS at the time of holding and digesting. It is comprised so that the information which concerns on the stop symbol of a decorative symbol and a fluctuation | variation aspect may be transmitted to the sub sub control part SS at the timing after performing transmission processing.

  Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the variation suggestion display mode management process according to the subroutine of step 3150 in FIG. First, at step 3152, the drawing hold information display control means SM 22 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM 22 b and determines whether or not the symbol change is a symbol change related to trigger hold. In the case of Yes in step 3152, the drawing hold information display control means SM 22 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM 22 b in step 3154 and whether or not the said symbol variation relates to the first main game side Determine if If Yes in step 3154, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines the variation indication display mode on the first main game side in step 3156 and sets (a command is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS Become). Next, in step 3158, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines the variation suggestion display mode on the second main game side as "none" (meaning that the variation suggestion display mode is not displayed). To set (a command will be sent to the sub-sub control unit SS), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2308).

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 3154, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 at step 3160 "none" (the variation suggestion display manner is not displayed) (Means that the command will be sent to the sub-sub control unit SS). Next, in step 3162, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines and sets the variation suggestion display mode on the second main game side (a command will be transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS), , The next process (the process of step 2308).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3152, the drawing reservation information display control means SM 22 does not display the variation indication display mode on the first main game side in step 3164, (the variation indication display mode is not displayed (Means that the command will be sent to the sub-sub control unit SS). Next, in step 3166, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines that the second main game's variation suggestion display mode is "none" (meaning that the variation suggestion display mode is not displayed). To set (a command will be sent to the sub-sub control unit SS), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2308).

  Here, the two tables at the bottom of the figure are the variation indication display determination table (at the time of big hit) and the variation indication display determination table (at the time of losing). In the present embodiment, the variation indication display mode relating to trigger suspension is configured to be determined with reference to the variation indication display determination table. The types of the variation indication display modes that can be selected when determining with reference to the variation indication indication determination table (at the time of big hit) are “rainbow color”, “red color”, “green color”, “yellow color”, “blue color” , "Gray", and the types of display modes that can be selected in the case of determination with reference to the variation indication display determination table (at the time of losing) are "red", "green", "yellow", " There are five types of "blue" and "grey", and the number of types of the variation indication display mode is larger than the number of types of the hold display mode in any of the big hit and the lost time. In the present embodiment, determination is made with reference to the variation indication display determination table (at the time of a big hit) rather than types of display modes that can be selected when determination is made with reference to the variation indication display determination table (at the time of losing). Although the type of the variation indication display mode that can be selected in the case of being selected is configured to be more, it is not limited to this, and is selected in the case of determining with reference to the variation indication display determination table (at the time of big hit). It may be configured such that the types of display modes that can be selected in the case of determination with reference to the variation indication display determination table (at the time of losing) are larger than the types of the variation indication display modes to be obtained May be identical). Moreover, the said fluctuation | variation suggestion display aspect is drawn by the random number for exclusive use at the time of the said fluctuation | variation suggestion display aspect determination. It should be noted that "Red" is most likely to be selected when referring to the fluctuation indication display determination table (at the time of big hit), while "grey" is most easily selected when referring to the fluctuation indication display determination table (at the time of losing). The big hit expectation of the pattern fluctuation related to the fluctuation suggestion display when the fluctuation suggestion display is displayed (the appearance ratio of the big hit fluctuation to the total appearance ratio of the big hit fluctuation and the lost fluctuation) “Iridescent color” is selected only at the time of the big hit, and colors other than “rainbow color” are “red”, “green”, “yellow”, “blue”, “red” from the one with high expectation. "Gray" is the order. In addition, the said fluctuation | variation suggestion display aspect which can be displayed is an example to the last, and even if it increases and decreases a kind, even if it changes the color which can be displayed, there is no problem at all. Moreover, in this example, although it was comprised so that the design fluctuation concerning the trigger suspension could be expected to become a big hit by the display color of the said change suggestion display, it is not limited to this, For example, It may be configured to be able to indicate the gaming state after the special game is performed (or in combination with the expectation of becoming a big hit). In such a case, in particular, during the probability variation gaming state, transition to the probability variation gaming state after the special game is executed when it becomes a big hit by the symbol variation during variation by the display color of the variation suggestion display It is advantageous for the player by configuring to indicate the degree of expectation (for example, the probability change expectation is large if the variation indication display mode is “red”, the probability change expectation is low if “gray”, etc.) It is possible to execute an effective effect asking whether the probability variation gaming state continues or ends.

  In this embodiment, the sub suggestion side is to execute the indication of variation indication according to the indication manner of variation indication set in the process of the figure, and the symbol variation is a variation relating to the first main game side In the case where the variation suggestion display aspect of the first main game side is displayed, and the variation suggestion display aspect of the second main game side is not displayed, while the symbol variation concerned is a variation pertaining to the second main game side , The second main game side's variation suggestion display mode is displayed, and the first main game side's variation suggestion display mode is not displayed. Moreover, when the said fluctuation | variation suggestion display aspect is "none", it will be displayed by "white." The setting of the command according to the variation indication display mode in the process of FIG. 5 may be executed simultaneously with the setting of the command according to the suspension display mode in step 3050 and step 3100 (the variation indication is set in the setting of suspension display mode A set of display aspects may be included). Moreover, in the present embodiment, the transmission order of the command transmitted to the sub sub control unit according to the suspension display and the variation suggestion display is “1st main game side hold change effect → 1 to 2 main game side 1-2 Hold display mode for the hold of the second digest order → hold display mode for the third save order of the first main game side → hold change effect for the second main game side → 1 for the second main game side The second display order of the second order of detention → the second main game side of the third order of detention order of the second main game side → the first main game side and the second main game side Hold display based on the hold display mode → the change pattern of the decoration symbol → the change suggestion display mode of the first main game side → the change suggestion display mode of the second main game side ”. In addition, as a configuration relating to the hold display (hold display mode corresponding to unsaved hold), for example, in the non-time shortening gaming state (when the open time extension function is not activated), the first main game side hold display and the first main game side 2 While both the main game side hold display is displayed on the effect display device SG, while in the time reduction game state (when the open time extension function is activated), the second main game side hold display is displayed but the first The hold display on the main gaming side may be configured to be hidden.

  Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, at step 2402, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2402, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the clothing display related information temporary storage means SM21b in step 2404. Next, in step 2406, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on a symbol variation flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2408, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the dressing variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 2410. Also in the case of No at step 2402, the process proceeds to step 2410.

  Next, in step 2410, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether the symbol change flag is on or not. In the case of Yes in step 2410, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the dressing variation time management timer SM 21t in step 2412. Next, in step 2414, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the variation start timing of the decorative symbol based on the dressing variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the dressing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether it has reached. In the case of Yes in step 2414, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the variation display command of the decorative symbol in step 2416 (sent to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control processing of step 2999). , And move on to step 2426.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2414, at step 2418, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 is decorated based on the dressing fluctuation time management timer SM21t and the fluctuation mode temporarily stored in the clothing display related information temporary storage means SM21b It is determined whether or not the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2418, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (temporary stop display command) of the decorative symbol in step 2420 (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the sub sub control unit SS side Sent to).

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2418, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and reach effect display control means SM25) at step 2422 is a drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t and notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b (and reach effect). Based on the variation mode temporarily stored in the related information temporary storage means SM 25 b), it is determined whether or not the display timing of the advance notice image or the reach image has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2422, in step 2424, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and reach effect display control means SM25) sets an image display command related to the notice image or the reach image (display command transmission control process in step 2999). , Sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and proceeds to step 2426. Also in the case of No at step 2422, the process proceeds to step 2426.

  Next, in step 2426, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the main gaming symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, with reference to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, the main game from the main control board M side) It is determined whether or not the information indicating that the symbol is stopped and displayed is received). In the case of Yes in step 2426, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b in step 2428, and the awakening stage flag It is determined whether or not there is an on state at step 2614). In the case of Yes in step 2428, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the awake stage stay counter SM23c in step 2430, and proceeds to step 2432. Also in the case of No at step 2428, the process proceeds to step 2432. Next, in step 2432, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and is a demon stage flag (a flag which is turned on while staying in the demon stage described later. It is determined whether or not it is turned on). If Yes in step 2432, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the demon stage stay counter SM 23c-2 in step 2434, and proceeds to step 2436. Also in the case of No at step 2432, the process proceeds to step 2436.

  Next, in step 2436, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (decision display command) of the decorative symbol (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). . Next, in step 2438, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the dressing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2440, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2500) Do. Also in the case of No in step 2410 or step 2426, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2500).

  Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, at step 2502, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether the special game in progress flag is off. If Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. If YES in step 2504, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b in step 2506 and step 2508, and the effect display device A big hit start display is performed on the SG (a display is appropriately made based on the type of big hit), and the process moves to step 2512. Also in the case of No at step 2502, the process proceeds to step 2512.

  Next, in step 2512, the background effect display control means SM 23 sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of wins on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side (gaming or big hit It may be performed as needed based on the type etc.).

  Next, in step 2514, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command for displaying an effect relating to a special game in progress based on the gaming state at the time of winning the corresponding big jack in execution and the jackpot symbol in suspension ( Sent to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process of step 2999) (for example, in the case of a special game or small hit game according to the latent probability variation big hit symbol, the game state after the end of the special game is played Effects that can not be recognized by the person may be performed). Next, at step 2516, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2516, in step 2518, the background effect display control means SM23 performs a big hit end display on the effect display device SG (displays appropriately based on the type of big hit). Next, in step 2520, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special game in progress flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2600). . Also in the case of No in step 2504 or step 2516, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2600).

  Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. First, at step 2602, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the awakening stage flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the background effect display control unit SM23 refers to the main information temporary storage unit SM11b and determines whether or not an awake stage transition command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2604, in step 2606, the background effect display control unit SM23 sets a "wake-up stage" as a stay stage. Next, in step 2608, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a command related to the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN 52c has been received from the main side. If YES in step 2608, the background effect display control unit SM23 sets the counter value of the received limited frequency counter AMN 52c in the wakefulness stage stay counter SM23c in step 2610, and proceeds to step 2614. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2608, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the wakefulness stage staying counter SM 23c at the predetermined number of times (60 times in this example) at step 2612 and moves to step 2614. In addition, when executing the processing of step 2612, it is supplemented that the main-side gaming state is the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state.

  Next, in step 2614, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, turns on the awake stage flag, and proceeds to step 2616. Also in the case of No at step 2602, the process proceeds to step 2616. Next, in step 2616, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the awake stage stay counter SM23c and determines whether the counter value is zero or not. The counter value of the awakening stage staying counter SM23c is configured to be decremented by one for each change (every stop of the main game symbol). If Yes in step 2616, then the process moves to step 2618. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2616, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the special game is won at step 2619 with reference to the main information temporary storage means SM11b. If Yes in step 2619, the background effect display control unit SM23 clears the counter value of the awake stage stay counter SM 23c to zero in step 2620, and proceeds to step 2618. Next, in step 2618, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, turns off the awake stage flag, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2999). Also in the case of No at step 2619, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing at step 2999).

  On the other hand, if No in step 2604, in step 2621 the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether the demon stage flag is off. If Yes in step 2621, in step 2622, the background effect display control unit SM23 refers to the main information temporary storage unit SM11b and determines whether or not the demon stage transition command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2622, in step 2624, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the "devil stage" as a stay stage. Next, in step 2626, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the command related to the counter value of the limited frequency counter BMN 52c-2 has been received from the main side. . If YES in step 2626, the background effect display control unit SM23 sets the counter value of the received limited frequency counter BMN 52c-2 in the demon stage stay counter SM23c-2 in step 2628, and shifts to step 2634. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2626, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the devil stage gaming state informing value determination table in step 2630 and determines the devil stage gaming state informing value by lottery. Here, the lower part of the same figure is an example of a demon stage game state notification value determining table. As shown in the figure, the demon stage game state notification value is configured such that two values of 10 and 30 can be selected, and 30 is more easily selected than 10 (the game state is In the case of probability fluctuation gaming state, a large value is easily selected). Next, in step 2632, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the determined demon stage game state notification value to the demon stage stay counter SM 23c-2 and shifts to step 2634. In addition, when executing the processing of step 2630, it is added that the gaming state on the main side is the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state.

  Next, at step 2634, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, turns on the demon stage flag, and proceeds to step 2636. Also in the case of No at step 2621, the process proceeds to step 2636. Next, in step 2636, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the demon stage stay counter SM23c-2 and determines whether the counter value is zero or not. Incidentally, the counter value of the demon stage stay counter SM 23c-2 is configured to be decremented by one for each change (every time the main game symbol is stopped). If Yes in step 2636, then the process moves to step 2638. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2636, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the special game is won with reference to the main information temporary storage means SM11b at step 2639. In the case of Yes at step 2639, the background effect display control means SM23 clears the counter value of the demon stage stay counter SM 23c-2 to zero at step 2640, and proceeds to step 2638. Next, in step 2638, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, turns the demon stage flag off, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2999). Also in the case of No at step 2639, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2999).

  On the other hand, if the result of step 2622 is No, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the main information temporary storage means SM11 b in step 2641 and determines whether or not the current gaming state is the probability fluctuation gaming state. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2641, in step 2642, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a "probable change stage" (a stay stage which can stay in the probability variation gaming state) as a stay stage, and executes the next process (step Transfer to 2999). On the other hand, if No in step 2641, in step 2644, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the "non-probable change stage" (the stay stage which can stay in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state) as the stay stage, Processing (processing of step 2999).

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the display on the effect display device SG has the suspension display and the variation indication, and the sub-sub according to the suspension indication and the variation indication. By displaying commands on the control unit SS side in an appropriate transmission order and transmission mode, the suspension display corresponding to the gaming state or the pre-reading effect being executed and the variation suggestion display are displayed on the effect display device Is possible.

  In the present embodiment, since the new trigger hold is not generated when the pre-reading effect is being executed, the command related to the hold pre-reading effect is not transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS. (It is assumed that the pre-reading effect is being executed even while the symbol variation related to trigger suspension is being executed). Although the present invention is not limited to this, when the pre-reading effect is being executed, a command relating to the pending pre-reading effect is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS, but the sub-sub control unit SS ignores the received command It may be configured not to execute command-based processing. In addition, a configuration that does not transmit the command relating to the pending pre-reading effect to the sub sub control unit SS or transmits the command relating to the pending pre-reading effect but is ignored by the sub sub control unit SS is limited only during the pre-reading effect. If, for example, the game state is scheduled to shift before all symbol variation related to the existing hold is over, or if the specific hold (not the trigger change is to be executed, hold for which the reach change is executed, predetermined time) The configuration may be applied even when there is a suspension) in which the above fluctuation time is reached. When the sub-sub control unit SS receives a command relating to the on-hold change effect and the on-hold display mode, the sub-sub control unit SS holds the information, and the command on the on-hold number and the on-hold display (steps 3060 and 3114). The received information is configured to be processed when the command to be set is received.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, two types of lost symbols relating to the first main game are provided, and one lost symbol (in this example, “HA”) is determined in the non-time shortening gaming state. , The variation mode may differ depending on the number of reservations at the time of variation related to the lost symbol, and the variation time is configured to be relatively short, and the other lost symbol (in this example, "HB") When it is determined, the fluctuation mode does not differ depending on the number of reservations at the time of fluctuation according to the lost symbol, and the fluctuation time is relatively long, and the fluctuation mode group at the time of occurrence of the suspension By transmitting the variation mode random number division information to the sub-side, the selection tendency of the variation mode can be differentiated depending on the determined loss pattern, and the variation mode group and the variation mode random number division By the information, it will be able to determine whether to execute prefetching lottery, so that it is reduced data capacity.

  In the present embodiment, there is a time saving gaming state in which the second main game hold is present in the hold, and a hold is a big hit in the hold as a prohibition rule condition of the pre-reading lottery (pre-selection lottery at the time of winning). (Excluding a newly generated hold), a hold with information indicating that the trigger hold is present in the hold, etc. is exemplified, but the prohibition condition of the pre-reading lottery is not limited to this, for example, The prohibition condition may be the probability variation gaming state, the execution of a predetermined background effect, the number of main game reservations being equal to or less than a predetermined number, the execution of a predetermined reach effect, or the like.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery timing of the prefetch lottery is the winning timing of the game ball to the main game start port (first main game start port A10), but it is not limited thereto. Fluctuation stop timing (decorative symbol fluctuation stop timing), a predetermined timing in the middle of the fluctuation of the main gaming symbol (predetermined timing during the decorative symbol fluctuation), a fluctuation start timing of the main gaming symbol (decorative symbol fluctuation start timing) It may be as well.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, it is comprised so that it can transfer to limitation frequency after completion | finish of a predetermined big hit (4A, 5A, 3B, 4B), and big hit other than a predetermined big hit (3A, 7A, 9A, 5B, 7B) It is configured not to shift to the limited frequency after completion.

Second Embodiment
Here, in the present embodiment, one type of effect in which the display mode of suspension changes is provided as the prefetching effect, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and various effects relating to prefetching effect or suspension may be performed. Therefore, such a configuration is described as a second embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  In the second embodiment, 1 is added to the counter value when there is a hold at the fluctuation start timing, and when there is no hold at the timing when the fluctuation ends, the counter value is reset ( Zero-cleared) Determines the expected degree display scenario that displays the expected degree of jackpot continuance counter SM22c, which is a counter to be cleared, and the jackpot preparation display mode (the reserved display mode related to prefetch effect, the details will be described later). And a hold distribution scenario determination table SM22ta, which is a table for In addition, the counter value addition timing of the with-pending continuation counter SM22c is not limited to the fluctuation start timing, and 1 is added to the counter value when there is a hold at any timing in one fluctuation. What is necessary is just to be configured, that is, the counter value may be configured to be the number of times the variable display continues while avoiding the situation where the hold is 0 at the time of the variable stop state.

  First, FIG. 35 is a main flowchart of the sub control substrate S side (in particular, the sub main control unit SM side) in the second embodiment. The difference with this embodiment is steps 2003-1 (second) and step 2050 (second), that is, based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side) in step 2002, the initial processing In step 2003-1 (second), the sub main control unit SM causes the trigger suspension (from the information regarding the suspension temporarily stored in the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b to Delete the information to the effect that it is the winning hold) (if there is no hold with the information that the trigger is hold, this processing will not be executed) While displaying all "inclusive" in "white", the counter value of the pending continuation counter SM22c is cleared to zero (the process related to the pre-reading effect is reset).

  Thereafter, the process shifts to loop processing in which (b), which is the repetitive processing routine of the sub main control unit SM, is repeatedly executed. Here, when (b) is executed, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM will be described later in step 2050 (second), as shown in the process of FIG. The on-hold simultaneous change management process is executed, and the process shifts to step 2100.

  Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the suspension simultaneous change management process according to the subroutine of step 2050 (second) of FIG. 35 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2052, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state. If Yes in step 2052, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b in step 2054, and the hold display mode is a special display mode (a simultaneous hold change described later) It is determined whether or not there is a pending display mode) that will be displayed in the effect. In the case of Yes at step 2054, at step 2056, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the background rendering related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the demon stage flag is off. Here, in the second embodiment, when the demon stage flag is on, that is, in the non-time shortening gaming state and the limited frequency state, the simultaneous holding change effect and the holding continuation counter SM22c described later It is configured so that addition of the counter value is not executed (even in the same gaming state, the executability of simultaneous holding change effect may be different). In the second embodiment, the counter value of the pending continuation counter SM22c is configured not to increase when there is a pending status in which the pending display mode is the special pending display mode. It is also possible to configure so that the counter value of the pending continuation counter SM22c can be increased even when there is a pending, which is a special pending display mode, without limitation.

  In the case of Yes in step 2056, in step 2058, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the change start timing of the main game symbol has been reached. If Yes in step 2058, in step 2060, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 adds 1 (increment) to the counter value of the hold continuation counter SM22c. It should be noted that the on-hold continuation counter SM22c is configured to be cleared to zero when the number of on-hold on the first main game side becomes 0 (when the on-hold is interrupted) when the change of the main game symbol stops. Next, in step 2062, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the hold continuation counter SM22c, and the counter value is a simultaneous hold change presentation execution value (a counter value for executing the simultaneous hold change presentation, In this example, it is determined whether or not 25). Here, the simultaneous change effect is an effect of changing the display mode of all the hold to the special display mode (details will be described later).

  Next, in step 2066, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the all hold hold display mode (display mode of the hold image display corresponding to the main game side hold and the variation suggestion display mode {in the paragraph As will be described later, it is not for the holding image display corresponding to the holding on the main game side but for notifying that the main game side is in the holding and digesting state (indicating that the symbol variation relating to the digested holding is in progress) The display mode relating to the image display is changed to the special display mode. Next, at step 2068, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 turns on the simultaneous holding change presentation execution variation flag in the flag area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and proceeds to step 2070. Also, if the result of the step 2058 or the step 2062 is NO, the process moves to the step 2070. Next, in step 2070, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets a command for displaying the counter value of the hold continuation counter SM22c on the effect display device SG (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the sub sub control unit It is transmitted to the SS side), and the process proceeds to step 2072. Here, in the second embodiment, when the hold is digested and the change is executed, the change indication on the effect display device SG is in the same or similar display mode as the hold display mode according to the hold. The display mode (the variation indication image) is configured to be displayed.

  On the other hand, if No in step 2052, step 2054 or step 2056, in step 2078, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 makes a command to hide the counter value of the hold continuation counter SM22c on the effect display device SG. It is set (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process of step 2999), and the process proceeds to step 2072. In the second embodiment, when the counter value of the suspension continuation counter SM22c is not displayed at step 2078, the counter value is not added while the number of reservations becomes 0 The counter value is configured to be reset. For example, the normal gaming state (non-probability fluctuation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state) and the devil stage flag are off, and the counter value of the hold continuation counter SM22c is a predetermined value The devil stage flag is on when the devil stage is turned on (for example, 15) and the normal game state and the devil stage flag are turned off again. If the pending continuation counter SM22c does not become 0 in the status, the pending continuation counter SM Display counter value and the counter value of 2c is predetermined value is a counter value at the time of transition to the devil stage (e.g., 15) so that the return at. In addition, the devil stage is a stay stage which shifts after the end of the small hit game or after the end of the special game relating to the latent probability variation big hit symbol (in this example, 3A). Further, the configuration relating to the display of the counter value may be applied not only to the devil stage but also to the transition of the stay stage where the gaming state does not shift (for example, the normal gaming state before or after the stage transition). .

  Next, at step 2072, the drawing hold information display control means SM 22 refers to the flag area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM 22 b and determines whether the simultaneous holding change presentation execution variation flag is on or not. . In the case of Yes in step 2072, in step 2074, the drawing hold information display control means SM 22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM 11 b and determines whether or not the fluctuation end timing of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2074, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 turns off the simultaneous holding change effect execution variation flag in the flag area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22 b in step 2076, and the next process The process proceeds to (the process of step 2100). Also in the case of No in step 2072 or step 2074, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2100). The pending display mode does not change to the special display mode before the change before the change when the count value of the hold continuation continuation counter SM22c becomes 0, and the change start time (step 2066) It will change to a special display mode.

  In the second embodiment, although the counter value of the hold continuation counter SM22c is added even during the pre-reading effect execution, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to be displayed. In such a configuration, addition of the counter value of the on-hold continuation counter SM22c is executed even during the execution of the pre-reading effect as in the process of the present embodiment, and on-pending is performed at the end of the pre-reading effect It is desirable to configure so that the counter value of the continuation counter SM22c can be displayed again (the counter value added during execution of the pre-reading effect will be taken into consideration). Such a configuration is more preferable in the case of performing pre-reading effect (so-called pre-reading zone effect) that indicates the presence of a high-hit expected high-hold by the transition of the staying stage.

  Next, FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 of FIG. 35 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2126 (second) to step 2132 (second) and step 2900 (second). That is, if the newly generated hold in step 2110 is the hold on the first main game side, in step 2126 (second), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 is a drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22 b With reference to the flag area, it is determined whether or not the simultaneous holding change effect execution under fluctuation flag is off. If Yes in step 2126 (second), in step 2128 (second), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the hold continuation counter SM22c, and the counter value is the read ahead prohibition value (21 to 25). It is determined whether or not. If Yes in step 2128 (second), the process moves to step 2150. In the second embodiment, when the count value of the on-hold continuation counter SM22c is the read-ahead prohibition value (21 to 25), that is, immediately before the simultaneous holding change effect is executed, the simultaneous holding change effect is executed and the advance reading effect In order to avoid overlapping with the execution of the pre-reading effect is configured not to be performed.

  Also, if a new hold is a trigger hold at step 2112, at step 2900 (second), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 executes a first main game look ahead holding content determination process described later, and step Transition to 2114.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2126 (second), in step 2130 (second), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets the hold display mode of the new hold (the hold on the first main game side) to special The display mode (the same display mode as the hold display mode which is to be changed in the simultaneous hold change presentation) is determined, and the process shifts to step 2116. As described above, in the second embodiment, the hold that occurs at the time of the change relating to the execution of the simultaneous hold change presentation is also displayed in the special display mode.

  In step 2200, after the second main game winning combination pre-reading determination processing is executed, in step 2131 (second), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22 b. , It is determined whether the new hold is a trigger hold. If Yes in step 2131 (the second step), after executing the second main game look-ahead hold content determination process (the process content of the pre-read hold content determination process in this embodiment has the same process content) in step 2250 The process shifts to 2132 (second), and in the case of No, the process shifts to step 2132 (second) without executing the processing of step 2250. Next, in step 2132 (second), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines the display mode of the hold other than the trigger hold to “white”, and shifts to step 2116.

  Here, in the second embodiment, when there is a hold on the second main game side at the timing when the hold on the first main game side occurs, the processing related to the prefetching on the first main game side is reset. (The first main game look-ahead execution flag is turned off, deletion of information indicating that the trigger is on hold, reset of the on-hold display mode), but in the process of the reset, the on hold on the second main game side has occurred ( Alternatively, it may be configured to be executed when there is a hold of the first main game side at the timing when the fluctuation of the second main game side starts), that is, the prefetch related to the first main game side During the execution of the effect, it may be configured that there is no hold of the second main game side (in the second embodiment, the hold of the second main game side is the first main game side) The second main game player's There When occurring, since the order in which the digestion of the trigger hold from being changed). Also, even when there is a hold on the second main game side, it may be possible to configure pre-reading effect relating to the first main game side, in particular, during execution of pre-reading effect relating to the first main game side (For example, during the execution of a series of continuous effects over the course of 3 pending digests), if the 2nd main game side is interrupted by a pending action (for example, it will be executed when the 1st pending action is taken) If it is interrupted during the continuous production, the pre-reading effect during the execution is temporarily suspended (the continuous production to be executed at the time of the settlement of the first hold is completed, and at the time of the settlement of the second hold) The execution of the continuous effect to be executed may be suspended temporarily), and it may be configured to be resumed after the symbol change related to the second main game side suspension has been interrupted (for example, temporarily suspended) Continuous rendering and maintenance that is performed at the time of the second It may be configured to perform a continuous production which is scheduled to run at the time of the three eyes of digestion).

  Next, FIG. 38 is a flowchart of first main game winning prediction time pre-reading determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2150 of FIG. 37 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2750 (second), step 2800 (second), step 2850 (second) and step 2180 (second) to step 2184 (second). That is, when there is no hold which will be a big hit in the hold before the new hold in step 2160, in step 2750 (second), the reserve prefetching effect executability judging means SM26k determines the huge reserve prefetching process described later Run. Next, in step 2800 (second), pending pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k executes a skewer pending pre-reading judgment process described later. Next, in step 2850 (second), the reserve pre-reading effect executability determination means SM 26 k executes a reserve share pre-reading determination process, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2112).

  On the other hand, if there is a second main game hold in the hold at step 2152, then at step 2180 (second), the hold prefetching effect executability judging means SM26k resets (zero clears) the hold continuation counter SM22c. Next, at step 2182 (second), the first pre-playing read execution flag (a huge hold pre-read execution flag, which is in the flag area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22 b) Turn off the skewed pre-read execution flag and the preemptive read execution flag). The giant hold prefetch execution flag is a flag that turns on at step 2766, the skewer hold prefetch execution flag at step 2818, and the hold allocation prefetch execution flag turns on at step 2868. Next, in step 2184 (the second), the reserve pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k is information indicating that it is "trigger hold" from the information concerning the hold temporarily stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22 b. Is deleted, and all the pending display modes are changed to "white" (if there is no pending with information that the trigger is pending in the pending, and all the pending display modes are "white" Is transferred to the next process without executing this process) and the next process (the process of step 2112). In addition, in the board configuration of the second embodiment, in the normal gaming state (non-probability fluctuation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state), the game is played by hitting the left (continue to shoot the game ball toward the left side of the board). Since it progresses and is configured such that the second main game hold does not occur (or is difficult to do), if there is a second main game hold in the hold at step 2152, the process related to the prefetching and Although it is configured to clear all the counter values of the pending continuation counter SM22c, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the process of clearing the counter value of the pending continuation counter SM22c in step 2180 (second) is not executed. It is also good. In addition, as a board configuration different from the second embodiment, a configuration in which the second main game hold can occur even in the normal game state (for example, in the normal game state, the second main game start opening electric role B11d is opened for a long time In the case of having a configuration to obtain, a distribution start port unit C50, and a configuration in which the first main game hold and the second main game hold can be alternately generated in the normal gaming state, etc.), A configuration in which the counter value of the pending continuation counter SM22c is not cleared is more preferable.

  Next, FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the giant hold prefetching determination process according to the subroutine of step 2750 (second) of FIG. 38 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2752, the reserve pre-reading effect execution permission determination means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11 b, and determines whether or not all the stop symbols of suspension before the new suspension are "HB" symbols. Do. Here, in the second embodiment, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the fluctuation time relating to the “HB” symbol all becomes a fluctuation time of a short time (15 seconds or less). The stop symbols for suspension are all configured to be “HB” symbols (in the case of other symbols, there is a risk of causing doubts to the player, such as reach change being executed before the trigger suspension is digested. ).

  If YES in step 2752, in step 2754, pending pre-reading effect executability determination means SM 26 k refers to the main information temporary storage means SM 11 b and determines whether or not the new pending is a big hit pending. If Yes in step 2754, in step 2756, the reserve pre-reading effect executability judging means SM 26k executes a huge reserve pre-reading lottery winning with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/10), and shifts to step 2762. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2754, in step 2758, the reserve pre-reading effect executability decision means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11 b, and the new suspension stop symbol is "HB" or "HC". Determine if there is. In the case of Yes in step 2758, in step 2760, pending pre-reading effect executability judging means SM 26k executes a huge pending pre-reading lottery winning with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/20), and shifts to step 2762. In the case of Yes in step 2754, that is, in the case where the new hold is a hold that makes a big hit, the huge hold look-up lottery is configured to be executed, but as a condition for executing the huge hold look-up lottery, It is also possible to be a big hit (2) the number of rounds to be executed is large (for example, 16R) a big hit, etc. {in that case, a huge reserve prefetch lottery is executed even at the time of losing If it is a big hit, it may be configured to be (1) or (2), and if it is lost, it will not execute a huge reserve look-ahead lottery, but when a huge reserve display is made, (1) or (2 May be configured to be deterministic).

  Next, in step 2762, the pending pre-reading effect executability judging means SM 26 k refers to the executed pre-reading lottery result, and determines whether or not the huge pending pre-reading lottery is won. In the case of Yes in step 2762, in step 2764, pending pre-reading effect executability determination means SM 26 k adds information indicating “trigger pending” to the new pending winning in the huge pending read lottery. Next, in step 2766, the pending prefetch effect execution executability judging means SM26k turns on the huge pending prefetch execution flag in the flag area of the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and the next process {step 2800 (second step To the processing of). Also in the case of No at step 2752, step 2758 or step 2762, the processing shifts to the next processing {processing of step 2800 (second)}.

  Next, FIG. 40 is a flowchart of a skewing suspension prefetching determination process according to the subroutine of step 2800 (second) of FIG. 38 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2802, the pending pre-reading effect executability judging means SM 26 k refers to the flag area of the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM 22 b and determines whether or not the huge pending pre-read execution flag is off. Here, in the second embodiment, the huge reserve pre-reading effect and the skewer pending pre-reading effect are configured not to be performed at the same time.

  In the case of Yes in step 2802, in step 2804, the reserve pre-reading effect executability determination means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11 b, and all the stop symbols of suspension before the new suspension are "HB" symbols It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2804, in step 2806, pending pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11 b and decides whether or not the new pending is a big hit pending. In the case of Yes in step 2806, in step 2808, the holding pre-reading effect executability judging means SM 26k executes a skewer holding pre-reading lottery to be won with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/10), and proceeds to step 2814. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2806, at step 2810, the reserve pre-reading effect executability decision means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11 b and whether or not the stop symbol of the new reserve is "HC" or not Determine In the case of Yes in step 2810, in step 2812, the reserve pre-reading effect executability judging means SM 26k executes a skewer reserve pre-reading lottery winning with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/20), and proceeds to step 2814.

  Next, at step 2814, the pending pre-reading effect executability judging means SM 26k refers to the executed pre-reading lottery result, and decides whether or not the caricature-pending pre-reading lottery is won. In the case of Yes in step 2814, in step 2816, pending pre-reading effect executability judging means SM 26k adds information to the effect that "trigger is on hold" to the new pending winning in the said skewing pending pre-reading lottery. Next, at step 2818, pending pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k turns on the skewing pending pre-reading execution flag in the flag area of drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22 b, and carries out the following process {step 2850 (the second step To the processing of). Also in the case of No at step 2802, step 2804, step 2810 or step 2814, the process proceeds to the next process {the process of step 2850 (second process)}.

  Next, FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the hold allocation prefetch reading determination process according to the subroutine of step 2850 (second) of FIG. 38 in the second embodiment. First, at step 2852, with the reserve prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM 26 k, the flag area of the drawing reserve information temporary storage means SM 22 b is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the huge reserve prefetch execution flag is off. Here, in the second embodiment, the huge reserve pre-reading effect and the reserve allocation reserve pre-reading effect are not performed simultaneously, but the bark reserve pre-reading effect and the reserve allocation pre-reading effect can be performed simultaneously.

  In the case of Yes in step 2852, in step 2854, pending pre-reading effect execution permission determination means SM 26 k refers to main side information temporary storage means SM 11 b, and all stop symbols of pending before the new pending are “HB” symbols It is determined whether or not. If Yes in step 2854, in step 2856, the holding pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11 b and judges whether the new holding is a big hit holding or not. In the case of Yes in step 2856, in step 2858, the reserve pre-reading effect executability determination means SM 26k executes a reserve allocation pre-reading lottery winning with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/10), and proceeds to step 2864. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2856, at step 2860, the reserve pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11 b, and the new stop symbol is "HB" or "HC". Determine if there is. In the case of Yes in step 2860, in step 2862, the reserve pre-reading effect executability determination means SM 26k executes a reserve allocation pre-reading lottery winning with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/100), and proceeds to step 2864. In the second embodiment, when the stop symbol of the new hold is “HB” or “HC” in step 2860, the hold pre-reading lottery is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, regardless of the type of the new hold stop symbol (that is, even if the new hold stop symbol is "HA"), it may be configured to execute the hold ratio pre-reading lottery.

  Next, in step 2864, with reference to the result of the pre-reading lottery that has been executed, it is determined whether or not the pending pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k has won the pre-selection lottery for holding. In the case of Yes at step 2864, at step 2866, pending pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k adds information to the effect that "trigger is on hold" to the new on-hold that has been elected for the pending pre-reading lottery. Next, in step 2868, pending pre-reading effect execution possibility determination means SM26k turns on the pending allocation pre-reading execution flag in the flag area of the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22 b, and the next process (the process of step 2112) Migrate to Also in the case of No at step 2852, step 2854, step 2860 or step 2864, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2112).

  As described above, in the second embodiment, there are three types of pre-reading effects, and not only the pre-reading effect mode but also the condition of the suspension symbol of the hold that can be the trigger hold and the pre-reading effect that can be executed simultaneously are different. It is configured. Moreover, in all pre-reading effects, the condition of the stop symbol of the suspension before the trigger suspension is "HB" (the lost symbol which becomes a short fluctuation of 15 seconds or less), and by configuring in this way, the trigger suspension Can give a sense of expectation to the fluctuation related to the case, and can prevent the situation where the player misunderstands that the trigger is on hold for the hold before the trigger. It should be noted that the simultaneous pending change effect is different from the condition whether the three types of pre-reading effects are triggered by the pending, and the pending display mode of all the pending and the variation display mode changes regardless of the stopping symbol related to the pending It will be done.

  In addition, when the composition according to the symbol type to be stopped and the prefetch lottery winning probability in the second embodiment is put together, (1) the selection tendency of the lost symbol depends on the number of reservations (the variation mode selection candidate differs depending on the number of reservations The dependency tendency to be obtained) or the dependency on the number of reservations (depending on the variation number depending on the number of reservations). (2) In the case of "HB", the selection tendency is dependent on the number of reservations, and in the case of "HC", the selection tendency is independent of the number of reservations. (3) If the symbol to be stopped due to a change related to a certain hold is "HC", the relevant certain hold will be read prior to the lottery than if the symbol to be stopped due to a change related to a certain hold is "HB" The probability of winning is high (the probability that the display mode of the holding image changes) is high. (4) If the symbol to be stopped due to a change related to a certain hold is a big hit symbol, the certain hold will win the prefetch lottery than if the symbol to be stopped due to a change related to a certain hold is "HB" It is configured that the probability of doing is high (the probability that the display mode of the reserved image changes). It should be noted that the winning rate of the pre-reading lottery may be a relative winning rate taking into consideration all pre-reading lottery such as huge pending pre-reading lottery, skewer pending pre-reading lottery, pending pre-reading lottery, etc. One kind of pre-reading lottery may be used. In addition, as a configuration of the second embodiment, when the symbol to be stopped due to a change related to a certain hold is a big hit symbol, read ahead than when the symbol to be stopped due to a change related to a certain hold is “HC” The selection probability may be configured such that the display mode of the hold image corresponding to the certain hold is determined to be a big hit decision (or a high hit probability is high) as a display mode.

  Next, FIG. 42 is a flow chart of the first main game pre-reading reserve content determining process according to the subroutine of step 2900 (second) of FIG. 37 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2902, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and refers to whether or not the huge hold prefetch execution flag is on. If Yes in step 2902, in step 2904, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines the hold display mode of trigger hold as the huge preparation hold display mode, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2114).

  On the other hand, if No in step 2902, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b in step 2906, and whether or not the skewer holding preread execution flag is on. Determine If Yes in step 2906, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b in step 2908 and determines whether or not the hold allocation read execution flag is off. Do. If Yes in step 2908, in step 2910, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines the hold display mode of trigger hold as the normal display mode (white in this example), and the next process (step 2114) Move to).

  On the other hand, if No in step 2906 or step 2908, in other words if the pending allocation read execution flag is on, in step 2912, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 prepares the suspension display mode for the suspension of trigger suspension Determine the display mode. Next, in step 2914, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the hold allocation scenario determination table SM22ta, and the expected degree display scenario of the hold allocation preparation display mode (displayed in the hold allocation preparation display mode, hold allocation The numerical scenario representing the degree of expectation changing to the display mode is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2114).

  Here, the lower part of the same figure is an example of the suspension assignment scenario determination table according to the second embodiment. As shown in the figure, when it is determined that the hold display mode is the hold ratio preparation display mode, it is up to the time of the hold when the hold is on for the trigger hold, and the change related to the trigger hold after the win. The fluctuation indication display mode displays the degree of anticipation as the hold ratio display mode. The larger the initial value (the degree of expectation displayed when a trigger is on hold), the higher the expectation that a trigger on hold is a big hit, the higher is the number of reservations on hold when a trigger is on hold. The larger the number, the smaller the initial value is. In addition, the expectation degree display scenario of each reservation division preparation display mode is comprised so that it may be selected equally. In addition, when the stop symbol determined to be trigger suspension is other than “HB”, the variation indication display mode related to the trigger suspension becomes the suspension assignment display mode at the time of variation related to the trigger suspension, and the trigger suspension is When the determined stop symbol is "HB", the variation suggestion display mode related to the trigger suspension becomes the reservation split preparation display mode (details will be described later). The contents of the expected degree display scenario may be changed, and the type of the numeral (display indicating the degree of expectation in which the variation indication display mode becomes the hold ratio display mode) is also not changed. It is desirable to configure it so as not to decrease as it approaches the fluctuation related to (in order to give the player a sense of expectation that the numbers are increasing).

  Next, FIG. 43 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2300 of FIG. 35 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2320 (second) to step 2330 (second) and step 2950 (second). That is, after the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol are determined in step 2306, in step 2320 (second), the clothing display content determination unit SM21n refers to the clothing display related information temporary storage unit SM21b and the fluctuation It is determined whether or not the indication display mode (the display object and the display mode when displaying the same or similar display mode as the display mode of the digested suspension according to the change in the change) is a special display mode . If Yes in step 2320 (the second), in step 2322 (the second), the drawing display content determination means SM 21 n refers to the special hold change effect content determination table based on the information on the stop symbol of the main game pattern. , Special relevant fluctuation indication display mode (this fluctuation suggestive display mode in the fluctuation related to suspension of special display mode, the details will be described later) and special advance notice effect contents (notice effect executed at the time of fluctuation according to special suspension display mode) To step 2308.

  Here, the lower left part of the same figure is an example of the special holding change effect content determination table according to the second embodiment. As shown in the figure, the special relevant fluctuation suggestion display mode and the special advance notice effect contents (the advance notice effect executed at the time of the change according to the special hold display mode) are different depending on the stop symbol. Further, in the second embodiment, the content (type) of the advance notice effect is configured to be different based on the selected special relevant variation indication display mode. In addition, in the change concerning the suspension of the special display mode in the second embodiment, the notice effect is configured to be different depending on the stop symbol of the main game symbol, but it is not limited to this. The preview effect may be configured to be different depending on the result of the above, or may be configured to be different depending on other factors such as the fluctuation time.

  On the other hand, if the result of step 2320 (second) is No, in step 2324 (second), the graphic display content determination means SM21 n refers to the counter value of the hold continuation counter SM22 c, and the counter value changes simultaneously. It is determined whether or not (in this example, it is 21 to 25 and is in the same range as the prefetch prohibition value). If Yes in step 2324 (second), in step 2326 (second), the figure display content determination means SM 21 n refers to the figure display related information temporary storage means SM 21 b and executes any one of the first main game pre-reading It is determined whether or not a flag (a huge pending prefetch execution flag, a skewed pending prefetch execution flag, a pending allocation prefetch execution flag) is on. If Yes in step 2326 (second), in step 2950 (second), the graphic display content determination means SM21n executes pre-reading effect content determination processing described later, and proceeds to step 2308.

  On the other hand, if the result of step 2324 (the second) is No, the figure display content determination means SM21 n determines the execution of the simultaneous holding change turning effect in step 2328 (the second), and shifts to step 2330 (the second) . Also in the case of No at step 2326 (second), the process proceeds to step 2330 (second).

  Here, the lower right of the figure is an example of the simultaneous holding change turning effect according to the second embodiment. As shown in the figure, in the second embodiment, at the time of execution of the simultaneous holding change turning effect, the holding display image, the variation indication display image, the simultaneous holding change turning effect, holding with continuation on the effect display device SG The counter value and the decorative symbol in change are displayed, and the simultaneous holding change turning effect is displayed so as not to overlap with other preview effects. The effect is an effect of informing the player that the counter value of the on-hold continuation counter SM22c is a value close to the simultaneous on-hold change effect execution value (25 in this example). Incidentally, in consideration of the counter value of the current suspension continuation counter SM22c and the number of reservations on the first main game side, it is substantially the case that the counter value reaches the simultaneous holding change effect execution value (25 in this example) If it becomes definite (if the second main game hold does not occur before the arrival and the jackpot does not become a big hit), it may be configured to notify the player of the substantially definite. . Although details will be described later, in the present example, the hold indication in the display area SG10 and / or the vicinity of the change indication and the hold indication and / or the change indication are displayed in the hold indication. The relevant effect display is referred to as reserve incidental information, and in the figure, the display relating to the simultaneous holding change turning effect is the reserve incidental information.

  Next, in step 2330 (the second), the clothing display content determination means SM21 n determines the content of the notice effect based on the information regarding the stop symbol and the fluctuation mode of the main gaming symbol, and proceeds to step 2308.

  Next, FIG. 44 is a flowchart of pre-reading effect contents determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2950 (second) of FIG. 43 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2952, the figure display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the figure display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the huge reservation prefetch execution flag is on. If Yes in step 2952, in step 2954, the device display content determination means SM21 n refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11 b and determines whether the change is a change relating to trigger suspension. In the case of Yes in step 2954, the graphic display content determination unit SM21 n turns off the huge reservation prefetch execution flag in the flag area of the graphic display related information temporary storage unit SM21 b in step 2955. Next, in step 2956, the figure display content determination means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main gaming symbol according to the change is "HB". In the case of Yes in step 2956, in step 2958, the costume display content determination means SM21 n displays the change suggestion display mode in a huge hold display mode at the start of the change, and relates to the stop symbol and the change mode Based on the information, the advance notice contents are determined, and the process moves to step 2964.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2956, in step 2960, based on the information on the stop symbol of the main gaming symbol and the variation mode, the fixed display content determination means SM21n determines the content of advance notice effect and shifts to step 2964. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2954, at step 2962, the model display content determination means SM21n displays the notice effect as a huge on-hold turn-on effect (for the player, the expectation to the change related to the on hold It is determined that the effect is given to the feeling), and the process moves to step 2964. Also in the case of No at step 2952, the processing shifts to step 2964.

  Next, in step 2964, the clothing display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the clothing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the piercing pre-reading execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2964, in step 2966, the figure display content determination means SM21 n refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11 b and determines whether the change is a change relating to trigger suspension. In the case of Yes in step 2966, in step 2967, the clothing display content determination means SM21 n turns off the skewer holding prefetch execution flag in the flag area of the clothing display related information temporary storage means SM 21 b. Next, in step 2968, the figure display content determination means SM21 n changes the variation suggestion display mode to a skewing suspension display mode during variation (for example, timing after 10 seconds from the start of variation), and the main game pattern Based on the stop symbol of the symbol and the information on the variation mode, the contents of the advance notice effect are determined, and the process proceeds to step 2972.

  On the other hand, if the result of step 2966 is No, the drawing display content determination means SM21 n holds the notice effect and holds the notice effect in step 2970. It is determined that the effect of giving an expectation until the change relating to the suspension for which the lottery has been won), and the process moves to step 2972. Also in the case of No at step 2964, the process proceeds to step 2972.

  Next, in step 2972, the figure display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the figure display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the pending allocation preread execution flag is on. In the case of Yes at step 2972, at step 2974, the device display content determination means SM21 n refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11 b to determine whether the change is a change relating to trigger suspension. In the case of Yes in step 2974, in step 2975, the drawing display content determination means SM21 n turns off the pending allocation read execution flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21 b. Next, in step 2976, the figure display content determination means SM21n refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main gaming symbol according to the change is "HB". In the case of Yes at step 2976, at step 2978, the clothing display content determination means SM21 n displays the change suggestion display mode at the start of the change in the hold ratio display mode, and relates to the stop symbol and the change mode of the main game symbol Based on the information, the content of the advance notice effect is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2308).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2976, the figure display content determination means SM21 n determines the notice effect contents in step 2980 based on the information on the stop symbol and the variation mode of the main gaming symbol, Transition to processing). On the other hand, if the result of step 2974 is No, the drawing display content determination means SM21n holds the notice effect on hold in step 2982. It is determined that the effect is given to the feeling), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2308). Also in the case of No at step 2972, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing at step 2308). In the second embodiment, since the skew pre-posting presentation effect and the pre-posting presentation effect can be performed at the same time, the process of step 2968 and the process of step 2978 can be simultaneously performed. . In the processing of step 2958, step 2960, step 2968, step 2978 and step 2980, the content of the indication of change suggestion related to the hold on trigger is determined.

  Next, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the variation suggestion display mode management process according to the subroutine of step 3150 of FIG. 43 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 3156 (second) and step 3162 (second), that is, in step 3154 when the symbol variation is a variation related to the first main game side, step 3156 (second step). In the second case, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 is a table for determining a scenario in which the variation suggestion display mode during the presentation effect execution is changing (the detail is described later). ) To determine and set the variation suggestion display scenario of the first main game side (a command will be transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS).

  Further, after the variation indication display mode relating to the first main gaming side is determined to be “none” in step 3160 and set (a command will be transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS), step 3162 (second) Then, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 is the table for determining the change suggestion scenario determination table (a table for determining a scenario in which the change indication display aspect is changing during the prefetch presentation effect execution, the details will be described later). Referring to the second main gaming side, the variation indication display scenario is determined and set (a command will be transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2308).

  Here, the two tables at the bottom of the figure are the variation suggestion scenario determination table (at the time of big hit) and the variation suggestion scenario determination table (at the time of losing). In the present embodiment, the variable suggestion display scenario relating to trigger suspension, which is a changing scenario of the variable suggestion display mode during the pre-reading effect execution, is configured to be determined with reference to the variable suggestion scenario determination table There is. The types of the variation suggestion display modes that can be selected when deciding with reference to the variation suggestion scenario determination table (common to big hit and lost time) are “rainbow color”, “red color”, “blue color” The three display timings (display mode change timings) of “timing 1”, “timing 2” and “timing 3” can exist in one symbol variation. In the second embodiment, "timing 1" is the symbol variation start timing, and the variation indication display mode displayed at "timing 1" is "timing 2" (for example, during symbol variation, false) It is comprised so that it may change in two timings of "timing 3" (for example, during normal reach, during super reach) after temporary stop in a continuous change. Note that "timing 1", "timing 2", and "timing 3" are sequentially from timings closer to the fluctuation start timing in symbol fluctuation. Moreover, in 2nd Embodiment, although "timing 1" was made into display modes other than "white", it is not limited to this, In the symbol change start timing, the said change suggestion display mode is made into the initial display mode. It may be displayed as “white”, and the variation suggestion display aspect may be changed at a plurality of timings during variation (eg, “white” → “as the variation time passes from the variation start timing It changes from "blue" to "red"). In addition, the changeable timing of the variation suggestion display mode may be increased or decreased, for example, each time the pseudo continuous symbol in the pseudo continuous variation (temporary stop symbol indicating that the pseudo continuous variation is to be executed) temporarily stops It may be configured such that the display mode can be changed, or the display mode can be changed during the symbol variation in the pseudo continuous variation, or the timing at which the normal reach effect is executed is “timing 3-1 The timing at which the first half of super reach is started may be "timing 3-2", and the timing at which the second half of super reach is started may be "timing 3-3" so that the display mode may change multiple times. . Moreover, when the said change suggestion display aspect changes, you may comprise so that a change production | presentation (effect for changing the said fluctuation suggestion display aspect) may be comprised, and when it is comprised like that, a change production Even if it occurs, there may be a case where the variation suggestion display mode does not change, or there may be a case where no change effect occurs at the timing when the change effect may occur. Further, as the type of the change effect that occurs, a change effect may be provided such that it is definite that the change indication mode changes when it occurs. In addition, even if the variation indication display mode that changes is ranked up (for example, it changes from "blue" to "red" but does not change from "red" to "blue"). It may be configured that the jackpot expectation is higher as the changing timing is later (for example, the jackpot expectation is higher when changing at "timing 3" than "timing 2"). In the second embodiment, the sub suggestion side executes the indication of variation indication in accordance with the indication scenario of variation indication set in the process of FIG. In some cases, the variation suggestion display aspect of the first main game side is displayed, and the variation suggestion display aspect of the second main game side is not displayed, while the symbol variation is a variation pertaining to the second main game side In this case, the variation suggestion display aspect on the second main game side is displayed, and the variation suggestion display aspect on the first main game side is not displayed. Moreover, when the said fluctuation | variation suggestion display aspect is "none", it will be displayed by "white." In the second embodiment, the variation indication is configured to be displayed regardless of the gaming state, but is not limited to this. (1) When the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state (2) In the case of the probability change gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, it may be configured that it is more difficult to be displayed (the probability of being displayed is lower) than in the other gaming states. Further, in the second embodiment, when the pending display changes, the pending display mode can be changed only once in one symbol change, whereas when the change indication is changed, the symbol changes once. The variation suggestion display mode is configured to be changeable three times (timing 1, timing 2 and timing 3), and the variation suggestion indication is more likely to change in one symbol variation than the pending indication. It has become. Moreover, when it is such a structure, when performing the change of a pending | holding display, and the change of the said fluctuation | variation suggestion display, you may comprise so that it may change with a certain action (for example, advance notice production etc.).

  Next, FIG. 46 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2400 of FIG. 35 in the second embodiment. The difference with this embodiment is step 2442 (second) and step 2444 (second). That is, after the main game symbol is stopped in step 2426, in step 2442 (the second), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the costume hold counter on the first main game side, and the counter value is 0. It is determined whether or not. If Yes in step 2442 (second), in step 2444 (second), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 resets the hold continuation counter SM22c (zero clear), and shifts to step 2428. On the other hand, if the result of the step 2442 (the second) is No, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of the step 2500).

  Next, FIG. 47 is an illustration of simultaneous holding change effect execution in the second embodiment. First, under the condition that the value of the hold continuation counter SM22c is 22, the simultaneous hold change turning effect is executed due to the fact that the value of the counter is 22. Thereafter, after the main gaming symbol is stopped three times, the next change starts, and the hold continuation counter SM22c has a counter value of 25 and the display of the counter value becomes non-display, and simultaneous holding change presentation is executed, all The display mode of pending and the display mode of change suggestion are changed to a special display mode (display mode of egg).

  After all the pending display modes and the variation indication display modes are changed to the special display modes, the stop symbol of the variation is "HA", "3A", "4A", "5A", "1K" or "2K" In this case, “person” is displayed as the special variation indication display mode at the variation start timing (immediately after the simultaneous holding change presentation is performed). After that, due to the fact that the special relevant fluctuation suggestion display mode is “person” with the same fluctuation, fluctuation time suggestive presentation (demonstration that suggests the length of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation) is executed. In addition, when the special relevant fluctuation indication display mode is “person”, it may be configured to indicate the effect mode (reach type or the like) other than the length of the fluctuation time.

  On the other hand, when the stop symbol of the change is “HB” after all the display suspension modes and the change indication display mode are changed to the special display mode, the change start timing (immediately after the simultaneous suspension change effect is executed) The "star" is displayed as a special said change suggestion display mode at. After that, with the same variation, the gameplay description presentation effect (a presentation for explaining the feature portion of the gameplay characteristic of the gaming machine) is executed due to the special relevant variation suggestion display mode being "star". Also, when the special relevant fluctuation indication display mode is "star", basically the gameplay description effect is executed, but the fluctuation related to the execution of the effect is a fluctuation that becomes a big hit In some cases, it may be configured to be able to execute an effect that suggests a big hit expectation such as “Gekiatsu” etc. (It may be performed with a part of the fluctuation that causes a loss).

  On the other hand, after all the pending display modes and the variation indication display modes are changed to the special display modes, the variation start timing (the simultaneous suspension when the stop symbol of the variation is "HC", "7A" or "9A" Immediately after the change effect is executed), the "chick" is displayed as the special variation indication display mode. After that, due to the fact that the special relevant variation suggestion display mode is a "chick" with the same variation, a concurrence result suggestive presentation (demonstration that implies the passing outcome of the variation) is executed.

  Thus, in the second embodiment, the content (type) of the notice effect in the certain variation is different depending on the type of the special variation indication display mode (or the stop symbol of the main gaming symbol) in the certain variation. It is configured to The notice effect relating to the suspension of the special display mode may be executed by the operation of the player (for example, depression of the sub input button SB). Also, when the special relevant variation indication display mode is "star", the advance notice effect is executed by the operation of the player, and when the special relevant variation indication display mode is "person" or "chick", the game It may be configured to be executed without intervention of a person.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment provides the player with a benefit (non-playing medium benefit) not related to the gaming medium, and a service (gaming machine interlocking) that generates new interest utilizing the non-playing medium benefit The system may be configured to provide a service) to the player. An example of the service includes a content step distribution service, a gaming machine effect custom service, and the like, and the content step distribution service refers to a web (mobile) communication terminal from a web (Web) site based on the game result in the gaming machine. Is a service that distributes specific image data, voice data, etc. in stages, and the gaming machine effect custom service is generated on the gaming machine based on the personal data of the player registered on the website. It is a service that allows the player to arbitrarily change image data and voice data used in various effects. In addition, the service may be applied to simultaneous holding change presentation, for example, the type of the special relevant fluctuation indication display mode related to the holding changed by simultaneous holding change presentation or the time related to the holding according to the special display mode The service is provided according to the type of special effect variation indication mode executed and / or the result of the effect (the number of types, whether or not an effect that is difficult to be generated is generated) by storing the type of the effect result. It may be configured to obtain. In addition, a point linked to the counter value of the with-hold continuation counter SM22c (for example, when the counter value immediately before being reset is 10 or more, the counter value becomes the point) is added to the player The points may provide the service. In such a configuration, it is desirable that the value of the hold continuation counter SM22c not be reset even when it reaches the predetermined value (25 in this example).

  In addition, the above-mentioned granted service is executed during standby demonstration (when the game ball has not been detected for a predetermined period of time or the game has not been determined for a predetermined period of time, etc. (For example, as the service, the player can select a background effect in a standby effect (or the type of selectable background effect changes)) It is also good.

  Next, FIG. 47 is an image diagram of pre-reading effect execution in the second embodiment. First, an example will be illustrated for a huge pending look-ahead effect. First, the decorative symbol fluctuates under the condition that the value of the hold continuation counter SM22c is 10. Thereafter, a hold is newly generated during the same change, and the new hold is won in the huge hold prefetch lottery, and the held hold is displayed in the huge preparation hold display mode. After that, the next change is started, and a huge on-hold turning effect is displayed on the effect display device SG. Thereafter, the main gaming symbol is stopped three times, the next change is started, and the huge hold display mode is displayed as the change suggestion display mode. In this example, when the huge reserve look-ahead lottery is won, the huge reserve display mode is always displayed as the variation indication mode, but it is not limited to this, and the huge preparation reserve display mode A pattern (Gasse pattern) in which the huge reserve display mode is not displayed at the start of the change according to (a) may be provided, and if configured as such, whether the huge reserve display mode is displayed in the huge reserve turning effect You may perform the effect which suggests the degree of expectation of (for example, a number is added for each change, and when the numerical value reaches 100, it becomes definite that the huge reserve display mode is displayed, etc. ).

  Next, an example of a skewer holding pre-reading effect is illustrated. First, the decorative symbol fluctuates under the condition that the value of the hold continuation counter SM22c is 10. After that, a hold is newly generated during the same change, and the new hold wins a skewed hold pre-reading lottery (the hold display mode is “white”). After that, the next change is started, and the on-hold change turning effect is displayed on the effect display device SG. Thereafter, at a timing 10 seconds after the main gaming symbol is stopped three times and the next change is started, the change suggestion display mode changes from the normal display mode (white display mode) to the skewer retention display mode. In the present example, when the user is elected to the skewed reservation pre-reading lottery, although the skewed reservation display mode is always displayed as the variation suggestion display mode, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fluctuation related to trigger suspension A pattern that does not change to the skewer retention display mode (a pattern that does not change as white, so-called, Gasse pattern) may be provided on the way, and if configured as such, the skewer retention display by the skewer retention / rollover effect An effect may be executed that indicates the degree of expectation of whether or not to change to an aspect. In addition, the pending display mode is changed in the fluctuation before the fluctuation related to trigger suspension (there are several types of suspension display modes that can be changed, and the big hit expectation increases with each change), You may be comprised so that a big hit expectation may be shown in a change suggestion display aspect. Further, the hold display mode may be configured to be a skewer hold display mode in the middle of the fluctuation before the fluctuation related to the trigger hold. When configured in such a manner, a pattern in which lightning is stuck on hold and becomes a skewer hold display mode, and a pattern in which lightning does not stick on hold and does not become a skewer hold display mode (the hold display mode does not change) And may be provided.

  Next, an example will be described of the hold apportioning read-ahead effect. In the second embodiment, since the execution mode of the change suspension turning effect is the same as the effect contents of the skewing suspension pre-reading effect, the details will be omitted. Note that the change pending turning effect relating to the pending rate pre-reading effect and the change pending turning effect relating to the skewing pending pre-reading effect may be configured to be different. In the reserve ratio pre-reading effect, after execution of the reserve change turning effect, the main game symbol stops 3 times, the next change is started, and the reserve ratio display mode is displayed as the variation indication mode. Incidentally, also in the reserve share pre-reading effect, a pattern (gasse pattern) may be provided which does not change to the reserve share display mode in the middle of the change relating to the trigger reserve as in the huge reserve pre-reading effect.

  Next, an example will be described in which the hold allowance pre-reading effect and the skewer hold pre-reading effect are simultaneously executed. In addition, since the effect contents are the same as those for the skewing and holding pre-reading effects until the execution of the change-pending and turning effects, details will be omitted. In the reserve allocation preparation display mode, “50”, which is an expectation degree at which the reserve allocation display mode is displayed as the change suggestion display mode, is displayed (in the display of “100”, the change is determined Become). After execution of the on-hold change turning effect, the main gaming symbol is stopped three times, the next change is started, and the on-hold division display mode is displayed as the change suggestion display mode. Then, in the middle of the fluctuation of the same fluctuation (timing 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation), it changes to the fluctuation suggestive display mode in which the stabbing display mode is overlapped with the suspension ratio display mode. In addition, in the pre-reading effect, the suspension display mode may be configured to be a skewer suspension display mode in the middle of fluctuation before fluctuation related to trigger suspension, and the above-described cassette pattern may be provided. In addition, when the reserve allocation pre-reading effect and the skew pre-order presentation effect are executed in duplicate, the lightning bolt is put on the hold relatively in comparison with the case where the reserve allocation pre-reading effect is executed alone without overlapping. It may be configured such that the ratio of the pattern in which the stowing display mode is displayed becomes high (the frequency of the gasse pattern becomes low).

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the simultaneous holding change presentation can be performed when the number of holdings does not become 0 for the predetermined number of changes (25 times in this example). By configuring to provide a plurality of pre-reading effects with different execution conditions, effect modes and holding change timings, the player can be made to various effects relating to holding and special effects executed for each predetermined number of changes. You will be able to proceed with the game without getting tired.

  In the second embodiment, the display timing of the huge preparation suspension display mode and the suspension allocation preparation mode is configured to be the suspension occurrence timing (prize timing), but the present invention is not limited thereto. From then on, it may be configured to be displayed at a timing before the start of fluctuation related to trigger suspension (for example, next fluctuation start, next fluctuation midway, next fluctuation start, next fluctuation midway timing, etc.).

  In the second embodiment, the giant hold display mode and the hold ratio display mode are configured to be displayed only as the change suggestion display mode related to trigger hold, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the trigger from the timing It may be configured to be displayed as the pending display mode (the pending display mode may be changed) at the fluctuation start timing (for example, the next fluctuation start, the next fluctuation start timing, etc.) before the start of the fluctuation related to holding.

  In the second embodiment, the pending continuation counter SM22c is an addition counter. However, the present invention is not limited to this and may be a subtraction counter. Moreover, although simultaneous change change production was constituted so that the state where the number of reservations was not 0 continued by repeating the predetermined number of times of change (in this example, 25 times), it is not limited to this, regardless of the number of reservations It may be configured to be able to be executed every predetermined number of changes (even if the number of reservations becomes 0 in the middle).

  In the second embodiment, when the simultaneous holding change presentation is performed, the holding display mode is changed to one type of special display mode, and thereafter, a plurality of types of special relevant fluctuation indicating display modes can be displayed. The present invention may be configured to be able to change to a plurality of special display modes at the time of execution of simultaneous holding change presentation.

  In the second embodiment, the advance lottery is executed depending on the type of symbol to be newly suspended (the jackpot symbol, the lost symbol "HB", or the lost symbol "HC"). Is not limited to this, and it may be determined by a new suspension fluctuation time (for example, whether or not the fluctuation time is a predetermined time or more), or the fluctuation mode It may be determined by the random number delimiter information (for example, whether or not the variation mode random number delimiter information is the delimiter 3). In addition, when it judges by fluctuation mode random number division information, the fluctuation mode group which can judge which stop symbol is "HA", "HB", or "HC" by the said fluctuation mode random number division information Alternatively, it may be configured to be the variation mode random number delimiter information).

  Also, in this example, the fluctuation time is divided into two blocks of A block which is a period before reaching reach fluctuation and B block which is a period after reaching reach fluctuation, and The variation addition time and / or the variation fixed time may be added to form one variation.

  Further, in this example, the fluctuation fixed time is set to be a long time (a time equivalent to the fluctuation time to reach, for example, 30 seconds), and the reach effect can be performed during the fluctuation fixed time. May be Alternatively, reach effect may be performed in the fluctuation time, and pseudo reach effect may be performed in the fluctuation fixed time, as fluctuation time <fluctuation fixed time. For example, the fluctuation fixed time is 90 seconds and the fluctuation time is 60 seconds, and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol related to the fluctuation time is "123" which is the special stop combination (the above-mentioned chance eye) ("4.04" The left and right rows may be the same stop symbol, and the middle stop symbol may be a special symbol), and then it is determined whether the change is a big hit or a loss at the fixed change time thereafter. The effect is performed such that the decorative symbol stop pattern becomes “444”.

  Further, in this example, as the number of reservations increases, it may be configured such that the fluctuation fixing time of a short time is easily selected as the fluctuation fixing time.

  Moreover, in this example, since the success / failure result, the stop symbol, the variation mode group, and the variation mode random number division information related to the suspension can be transmitted to the sub side when the suspension occurs, the occurrence of the suspension Even in the case where the gaming state is different between the time of day and the time of the settlement of the occurring hold, it is possible to determine whether or not the success / failure result and the variation mode group are the same (whether or not they are different). Therefore, even when the gaming state is different between the occurrence of the hold and the settlement of the hold that has occurred when the success or failure result and the variation mode group are the same, the pre-reading effect may be executed across the gaming state. Depending on the type of pre-reading effect to be executed, the pre-reading effect may or may not be performed across the gaming state.

  Also, a plurality of types of pre-reading effects may be provided, and pre-reading effects in which executability is different depending on the variation state of trigger suspension and pre-reading effect that can be executed regardless of the variation mode of trigger suspension may be provided. Also, a plurality of pre-reading effects may be generated simultaneously, or a plurality of pre-reading effects may be started simultaneously at the start of the pre-reading effect, and another pre-reading effect is started during execution of one pre-reading effect May be configured to In addition, the timing of rank increase of the pre-reading effect (for example, the expectation of the big hit is increased, for example, the pending display color changes to "blue → red") may be executed simultaneously, or ranks at different timing for each pre-reading effect. It may be configured to be up. In addition, a plurality of types of pre-reading effects may be provided, for example, pre-reading effects in which the pending display mode changes, chance eye-reading effects, background suggesting a big hit expected degree by stop appearance eyes (combination of stop patterns) of decorative symbols A change pre-reading effect, a countdown notice pre-reading effect, etc. may be provided. In addition, the plurality of pre-reading effects are the type or combination of pre-reading effects that can occur simultaneously, the rank-up degree (one step UP, two steps UP, not UP) when any occurs, the display mode that appears first The jackpot expectation, etc. may be configured to be able to differ depending on the symbol etc. scheduled to be stopped according to the suspension that triggered the pre-reading lottery, for example, when performing pre-reading effect according to “HC”, pre-reading according to “HB” There may be more types or combinations of pre-reading effects that can occur simultaneously, more rank-up degree when any occurs, a display mode with a high probability of big hit, or the like, which is likely to appear first, etc. .

  In the present embodiment, although the pre-reading lottery is not executed when the trigger holding exists in the holding, the condition for not executing the pre-reading drawing is not limited to this, for example, reach within the holding The pre-reading lottery may be configured not to be executed when there is a hold that is a fluctuation (a fluctuation of the main gaming symbol that is to execute reach effect).

  In addition, as a configuration of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the main gaming symbol is displayed once after repeating “temporary stop display → re-variation (so-called pseudo variation) of the left, middle and right symbols” a plurality of times during one variation of the main gaming symbol. By stopping the gaming symbol, it is possible to execute the pseudo continuous variation which is a rendering technique to show the player as if the main gaming symbol is fluctuating a plurality of times during one fluctuation of the main gaming symbol. You may In addition, when configured as such, during the execution of the pre-reading effect, the pseudo continuous fluctuation is not executed as the effect during the fluctuation related to the suspension which is digested before the trigger suspension, but as the effect during the fluctuation related to the trigger suspension It may be configured to be able to perform pseudo continuous variation.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the timing at which the variation indication display mode on the first main game side changes (displayed other than “white” which is the normal display mode) has a plurality of timings (at the start of variation, start of variation) (10 seconds after) exists, but the timing at which the variation indication display mode on the second main game changes (displayed other than "white" which is the normal display mode) is one type of timing (at the start of fluctuation) It has become only. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation suggestion display aspect on the second main game side may also be configured to be able to change during symbol variation, but in such a configuration, the first main game Side and the 2nd main game side (1st kind 1st kind multi-function machine), the direction of the 2nd main game's side is prioritized and digested rather than the 1st main game's side, The game is configured such that it is more advantageous for the player to proceed with the game on the second main game side than to proceed with the game on the game side, and the open time extension function is inactive (non-time reduction game state) The said variation in the second main game side at the time of opening time extension function operation (time reduction gaming state) than the kind of the timing where the said fluctuation suggestion indication feature of the 1st main game side in in the middle of symbol fluctuation changes There are fewer types of timing when the indication display mode can change in the middle of the symbol change Be configured is desirable.

(Modification 1 from the second embodiment)
Here, the second embodiment exemplifies a configuration that can appropriately execute the setting of the hold display mode and the command to the sub-sub control unit SS according to the variation suggestion display mode, but the specification is different from the second embodiment. In the gaming machine, the command contents and command contents more suitable for the specification of the gaming machine by using the hold display mode different from the second embodiment and the command contents and command transmission mode to the sub-sub control unit according to the variation suggestion display mode It can be a command transmission mode. Therefore, such a configuration will be described in detail as only a modified example from the second embodiment, as a first modification from the second embodiment.

  The gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment has a fluctuation fixed time timer MP12t for measuring the fluctuation fixed time of the main gaming symbol.

  First, FIG. 49 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of steps 1400 (1) and (2) of FIG. 9 in the first modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 1412 (second change 1), step 1450 (second change 1), step 1850 (second change 1) and step 1439 (second change 1) to step 1443 (second change). In the step 1410 (the second change 1), the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 determines the limit frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b after the stop symbol related to the main game pattern is determined in the step 1410. It is determined whether or not the limit frequency flag (in the first modification from the second embodiment, there is only one type of limit frequency state, and thus the limit frequency flag is set) is turned on. In the case of Yes in step 1412 (second variant 1), in step 1450 (second variant 1), the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN 52 executes limited frequency variation mode determination processing described later, and step 1650 (second variant). Shift to 変 1). On the other hand, if No in the step 1412 (the second change 1), the process proceeds to the step 1416 to determine the variation mode relating to the main gaming symbol, and then proceeds to the step 1850 (the second change 1). Next, in step 1850 (the second modification 1), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C execute a variation fixed time determination process, which will be described later, and shifts to step 1418.

  Also, after the flag during fluctuation is turned off at step 1434, at step 1439 (second change 1), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C determine the determined fluctuation fixed time and the fluctuation fixed time timer Set MP12t (decrement timer) and start the timer. Next, in step 1440 (the second modification 1), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C are in the flag area of the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. During fixing, the flag is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 1442 (second change 1).

  In addition, when the flag during fluctuation is off at step 1426, at step 1441 (second change 1), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C temporarily store the first and second main game symbol information. Referring to the flag area of the means MB11b-C, it is determined whether or not the variation fixed flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1441 (second variant 1), the process proceeds to step 1442 (second variant 1), and in the case of No, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600).

  Next, in step 1442 (second change 1), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the fluctuation fixed time timer MP12t to determine whether or not the timer value is 0. . In the case of Yes in step 1442 (the second change 1), in step 1443 (the second change 1), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C are the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means In the flag area of the MB11b-C, the variable fixed flag flag is turned off, and the process goes to step 1436. In addition, in the first modification from the second embodiment, since small hits are not provided and fluctuation fixed time is provided, the fluctuation start condition in step 1403 is not during special game, and the main game symbol The condition is that the game is not in motion, the main gaming symbol is reserved, and the motion fixed time is not in progress.

  Next, FIG. 50 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 (second modification 1) in FIG. 49 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 1464, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN 52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN 52c, and the counter value is mode A {in the first modification from the second embodiment, the stay mode If the stay mode is different, it is determined whether or not the limitation frequency table to be referred to is different) is configured to be different} range. In the case of Yes in step 1464, in step 1466, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN 52 refers to the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN 52ta (limit frequency table 1), based on the main gaming side random number and the win / fall lottery result. The variation mode (variation time) relating to the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to step 1472. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1464, at step 1470, the limitation frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the lottery table MN52ta (limit frequency table 2) for determination of limitation frequency variation mode and determines the main gaming side random number, Based on it, the variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to step 1472. The details of the limit frequency table will be described later.

  Next, in step 1466, the limited frequency change mode determining means MN 52 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN 52c. Next, in step 1474, the limited frequency change mode determining means MN 52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN 52c to determine whether the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1474, in step 1476, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN 52 turns off the limited frequency flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN 52b, Move to process 1). Also in the case of No at step 1474, the processing proceeds to the next processing {processing of step 1850 (second modification 1)}.

  Here, the lower part of the figure is a limited frequency stay mode determination table. As shown in the figure, in the first modification from the second embodiment, “mode A” and “mode B” exist as the limited frequency stay mode, and the stay mode (limited frequency stay mode) If the mode is "mode A", the variation mode is determined with reference to the limited frequency table 1, and if the stay mode is "mode B", the variation mode is determined with reference to the limited frequency table 2. It is configured. The stay mode is configured to be determined by the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN 52c, and when the special game is over and the limited frequency state is entered, the symbol variation of the main game symbol is executed 20 times. The mode is configured to be "mode A" → "mode A" → "mode B" → "mode A" {When "mode A" → "mode A", the stay mode is the same However, as described later, the stay stage may be different, that is, the variation mode determination table (limit frequency table) referred to when determining the variation mode managed on the main control board M side is Although identical, the stay stages managed on the side of the sub control substrate S are configured to be different). The contents of the limited frequency stay mode determination table may be changed without any problem, and the number of types of stay modes may be three or more, and the range of the limited frequency counter value, the transition mode of the stay mode, etc. may be changed No problem.

  Next, FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the variation fixed time determination process according to the subroutine of step 1850 (second variation 1) in FIG. 49 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 1852, the first and second main game symbol control means MP 11 -C refers to the limited frequency counter MN 52 c and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1852, in step 1854, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the symbol variation is limited. It is determined with reference to the frequency table whether or not it is the symbol variation for which the variation mode has been determined. In the case of Yes in step 1854, that is, in the case where the symbol variation is the final variation referring to the limited frequency table (in this example, the final variation of the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state), the first variation is made in step 1856. -The second main game symbol control means MP11-C determines the fluctuation fixed time of the symbol fluctuation to be a long time (a relatively long time is sufficient, in this example, 15 seconds), the next process (step Processing of 1418). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1852 or No in step 1854, in step 1858, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C are for a short time (relatively short If it is time, 0.2 seconds is determined in this example, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1418). Thus, the variation fixed time of the main gaming symbol according to the first modification from the second embodiment refers to the final variation referring to the limited frequency table (in this example, the final variation of the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state) , Are configured to be relatively long.

  Next, FIG. 52 shows an example of the main game table 1 and the main game table 2 in the first modification from the second embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is that no small hit is provided. The present invention is not limited to this, and even in the gaming machine having the configuration of the prefetch effect shown in the first modification from the second embodiment, small hits are provided similarly to the present embodiment and the second embodiment. You may have, and you may have two or more lost designs.

  Next, FIG. 53 is an example of the limited frequency table in the first modification from the second embodiment. In the first modification from the second embodiment, the gaming state when referring to the limited frequency table is the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, and is mainly in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state The second main game symbol is varied to advance the game. By being configured in this way, the first main game side of the fluctuation at the time of reference to the limited frequency table is usually not performed or is not likely to be performed (because it is irregular fluctuation), the first main game side At the time of the loss of the second main game side, the fluctuation time is relatively long as compared with the time of the second main game side, and the time for causing the second main game side to hold is secured. In addition, on the second main game side, the fluctuation time of 60 seconds or more is the reach fluctuation, and in the limited frequency table 1, the reach fluctuation can be executed at either the big hit or the lost time, but the limited frequency In Table 2, reach change is executed only at the time of big hit, and reach change is not executed at the time of loss, so when reach change at the time of reference to the limited frequency table 2, it becomes definite that the symbol change concerned becomes big hit (( There is no limitation to this, and it is only required that the probability that the symbol variation is higher than 50%, that is, the probability that the symbol variation when reaching reach when the limited frequency table 1 is referred to be a big hit). In addition, when the reach change occurs at the time of reference to the limited frequency table 1, the ratio of the symbol change to the big hit is about 50%. In the second modification from the second embodiment configured to transition between the situation in which the limited frequency table 1 is referred to and the situation in which the limited frequency table 2 is referred to in the probability variation gaming state by configuring in this manner. It is configured to be able to enjoy the game with two game characteristics of a situation where the big hit becomes definite when it becomes reach change and a situation where it can be expected to be big hit by 50% when it becomes reach change. .

  Next, FIG. 54 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. 49 in the first modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are steps 1554 (second variation 1) to 1560 (second variation 1), and the purpose thereof is as a probability fluctuation end condition in the first variation from the second embodiment. After the end of the special game, it is to add the end of fluctuation of the main game symbol a predetermined number of times. That is, in step 1554 (the second modification 1), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variation number counter MP51c and determines whether or not the counter value is larger than zero. If Yes in step 1554 (second modification 1), in step 1556 (second modification 1), the specific game control means MP50 subtracts 1 from the count value of the probability variation number counter MP51c. Next, in step 1558 (the second variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variation number counter MP51c and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1558 (the second change 1), in step 1560 (the second change 1), the specified game control means MP50 turns off the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specified game related information temporary storage means MB30b. And go to step 1570. On the other hand, if the result of the step 1554 (the second variation 1) or the step 1558 (the second variation 1) is No, the process proceeds to the step 1570.

  Next, FIG. 55 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 5 in the first modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 1605 (second variant 1), step 1608 (second variant 1), step 1610 (second variant 1) and step 1615 (second variant 1), ie, After turning on the specific game flag in step 1604, in step 1605 (second change 1), the specific game control unit MP50 resets (zero clears) the probability variation counter MP51c, and shifts to step 1606. After resetting (zeroing clear) the time reduction number counter MP52c in step 1606, in step 1608 (second change 1), the specific game control means MP50 resets (zero clears) the limited frequency counter MN52c and shifts to step 1612 . Further, after the condition device operation flag is turned off in step 1614, the specific game control means MP50 is a command relating to the special game winning command (indicating that the special game is won in step 1615 (second change 1), Set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM side that it is possible to notify the sub side that the specific game has ended by the command (Sub main control by the control command transmission processing of step 1999) The message is sent to the part SM side, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1700).

  Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game, according to the subroutine of step 1750 (second modification 1) in FIG. 20 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 1783, the specified game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specified game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, at step 1784, the specific game control means MP50 sets the probability variation counter MP51c a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example). Next, in step 1786, the specified game control means MP50 turns on the main game time short flag in the flag area of the specified game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, at step 1784, the specified game control means MP50 sets the time reduction number counter MP52c a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example). Next, at step 1787, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the limit frequency flag in the flag area of the limit frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. Next, at step 1788, the specified game control means MP50 sets the limited frequency counter MN 52c a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example). Next, in step 1789, the specific game control means MP50 is a command relating to the specific game start command (a command relating to the start of the specific game, and it is possible to convey to the sub side that the specific game has started by the command. ) Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub main control unit SM side (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999). Next, in step 1790, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the auxiliary game time short flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1800).

  Next, FIG. 57 is a main flowchart on the side of the sub control board S (in particular, the side of the sub main control unit SM) in the first modification of the second embodiment. The change point from the second embodiment is step 3200 (second variation 1), that is, after executing the stay stage determination processing in step 2600, the sub control substrate S is selected in step 3200 (second variation 1). Execute an initialization command transmission determination process described later, and shift to step 2999.

  Next, FIG. 58 is a flowchart of second main game winning combination prefetching determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 37 in the first modification from the second embodiment. The change point from the second embodiment is step 2207 (the second change 1), that is, when there is no hold that becomes a big hit in the hold before the new hold in step 2206, step 2207 (the second change 1). ), The reserve look-ahead effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the drawing reserve information temporary storage means SM22b, the new suspension is the final symbol variation in the specific game (limited in the first modification from the second embodiment) It is determined whether or not the final design variation in the frequency state is also the same variation) and it is not a reserve schedule for digestion. In the case of Yes in step 2207 (the second modification 1), while the prefetch lottery is executed in the processing after step 2208 in the case of No, it is determined that there is no target for executing the prefetch lottery and the next process { The process transitions to 2131 (second process). As described above, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the specific game final variation, that is, the final symbol variation in the probability variation gaming state capable of staying 80 variations (the stay stage management counter value is 1) In the above, the pre-reading lottery is not executed.

  Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the pending content transmission process according to the subroutine of step 3050 (second modification 1) in FIG. 37 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 3062, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the specific game in progress flag (turned on in the specific game is turned on in step 2654 described later It is determined whether or not the flag) is off. If the result of step 3062 is YES, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b in step 3064 to determine whether or not the first main game side pre-reading effect is being executed. judge. Here, the first main game side look-ahead effect according to the first modification from the second embodiment is a huge hold look-ahead effect, a skewer hold look-ahead effect, a hold ratio pre-read effect, and a hold simultaneous change effect. In the case of Yes in step 3064, in step 3066, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets the hold display mode after the change of hold for carrying out the hold change (after execution of the hold change presentation) to the sub sub control unit SS Would be Next, in step 3068, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 is the display order of executing the holding change (the display position of the holding display in the display area SG10, and the first to the fourth digestion order from the left) And step 3070 is performed. Also in the case of No at step 3064, the process proceeds to step 3070.

  Next, in step 3070, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the hold accompanying information pertaining to the hold allocation reading effect (relevant to the hold display displayed in the vicinity of the hold display in the display area SG10 or in the hold display). A certain effect display, for example, a number is displayed in the hold display, characters are displayed in the vicinity of the hold display, etc.) and a command relating to the contents of the effect is set (Hold split preparation display mode, hold change, turn effect, Etc. are set and transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS). Next, in step 3072, the drawing reservation information display control means SM 22 is displayed in the variation suggestion display incidental information related to the reserve allocation pre-reading effect (near the variation suggestion display in the display area SG 10 or in the variation suggestion display , And the effect display related to the change indication, for example, a number is displayed in the change indication, a character is displayed in the vicinity of the change indication, etc.) and a command relating to the contents of the effect It sets (the reservation division display mode etc. is set and it will be transmitted to the sub sub control part SS). As described above, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the display relating to the pending allocation pre-reading effect sets the command of the presentation content relating to the suspension display and the presentation content relating to the variation suggestion display in another process. It is configured to be

  Next, in step 3074, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 is associated with the holding attachment information (displayed in the vicinity of the holding display in the display area SG10 or in the holding display in relation to the holding display) A certain effect display, for example, a number is displayed in the hold display, characters are displayed in the vicinity of the hold display, etc.) and a command relating to the contents of the effect is set (gigantic preparation display mode, huge hold turning effect, huge The hold display mode, the background effect, and the like are set and transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS. Next, in step 3076, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 is related to the holding display associated with the holding display (in the vicinity of the holding display in the display area SG10 or in the holding display, according to the skewing holding prefetching presentation effect A certain effect display, for example, a number is displayed in the hold display, a character is displayed in the vicinity of the hold display, etc. and a command related to the contents of the effect are set (hold change turning effect, skewer hold display mode, effect Execution timing and the like are set and transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS), and the process proceeds to step 3084.

  On the other hand, if the result of step 3062 is NO, then in step 3078, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and whether or not the second main game side prefetching effect is being executed. Determine if In the case of Yes in step 3078, in step 3080, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 changes the suspension for executing the suspension change (as described above, the suspension display mode changes from “white” to “red” etc.) A subsequent hold display mode (for example, “red”) is set (a command will be transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS). Next, in step 3082, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 sets the holding order of holding (for example, the third display order of holding) for executing the holding change to the sub-sub control unit SS. The command will be sent) and the process moves to step 3084. Also in the case of No at step 3078, the process proceeds to step 3084.

  Next, in step 3084, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets the first main game hold number and the second main game hold number (a command will be sent to the sub-sub control unit SS), step 2250. The suspension display based on the suspension display mode determined in step 2114 is set (a command will be transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). Here, the lower part of the figure is an example of a command transmission mode related to the after-change on hold display mode and the on-hold display position, as shown in the figure, after change by the type of on-hold change effect command (command to sub sub side) The pending display mode is determined. Further, the command related to the pending change position (command to the sub-sub side) includes information relating to the variation indication, the first digestion order to the fourth digestion order. Here, when the feature points of the command related to the pending change presentation in the first modification from the second embodiment are described in detail, (1) In the case of the huge pending look-ahead presentation effect being executed for the post-change pending display mode If a command relating to the pending allowance pre-reading effect, the skewer pending pre-reading effect and the pending simultaneous change effect is set and transmitted, it is determined to be out of range (because the huge pending pre-reading effect is not executed simultaneously with other pre-reading effects), (2) Since the skew pre-posting presentation effect is not executed for the 4th postponing order pending, it is determined to be out of range when the command relating to the 4th posting order is set and transmitted, (3) The sub-sub control unit SS does not execute the process when it receives a command that is out of range (ignore the command that is out of range), and (4) "no change on hold" indicates that the change on hold is actual. Used to initialize (or change the display mode to "white") that is being held (for example, changed from "white" to "red") It is configured. Here, to describe “out of range” described above in detail, for example, the hold change presentation command is not sent to the sub-sub side at the time of the huge hold prefetching presentation effect execution, but the sub-side If a pending change command relating to a pending advance presentation effect is received, it is determined that it is out of range (ignoring the command received by the sub-sub side, receiving no command even if the command is received), ie, irregular status When the sub-sub side receives the transmitted command and determines that it is out of the range, it is configured to ignore the command (do not execute the process related to the command). In addition, when the sub sub side receives a command to the effect that it is the fourth digesting order as a pending change position command at the time of execution of a skewed pending look-ahead effect, the trigger pending related to the skewed pending pre-reading effect changes pending when trigger pending occurs. It is determined that the command is out of range because it does not. In addition, as a specific example of execution of the setting of the command concerning the pending change presentation contents and the pending change presentation, for example, when the pending change presentation is a huge pending look-ahead presentation effect, and the pending change position is the second digestion order The second variation order display is the giant reserve display mode, the reserve change presentation is the giant reserve look-ahead effect, and when the reserve change position is the change suggestion display, the change suggestion display is the giant reserve reserve display mode It becomes. In the figure, the hold change effect of the first main game is extracted, and the hold display position of the second main game is a display position different from the hold display position of the first main game. There is.

  Next, FIG. 60 is a flow chart of the process of sending a process of holding content at the time of the subroutine of step 3100 (second variation 1) in FIG. 37 in the first modification from the second embodiment. In the figure, the process is the same as the on-time hold content transmission process of FIG. 59, and thus the detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, FIG. 61 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2600 (second modification 1) in FIG. 57 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, at step 2652, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and from the main side a specific game start command (a non-probable fluctuation game state and a non-time shortening game state to a probability fluctuation game state and It is determined whether the information indicating that the time-saving gaming state has been transferred) has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2652, in step 2653 the background effect display control means SM23 sets an initial value (80) in the stay stage management counter (counter for determining the current stay stage). Next, in step 2654, the background effect display control means SM23 executes the specific game in-progress flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b (in this example, in the probability variation gaming state and time shortening gaming state Turn on the flag). Next, in step 2655, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the “normal probability change stage” as the stay stage, and shifts to step 2662.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2652, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b in step 2656, and the special game winning command (information indicating that the special game is won) is made from the main side. It is determined whether or not it has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2656, the background effect display control unit SM23 resets (zero clears) the stay stage management counter in step 2658. Next, in step 2659, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the specific game in-progress flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b. Next, in step 2660, the background effect display control means SM23 is a counter after a specific game (a counter for measuring the number of changes of the main game symbol from the timing when the specific game is ended by the passage of the change number of the main game symbol) Reset (zero clear). Next, in step 2661 the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the specific game end flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to step 2662. Also in the case of No at step 2656, the process proceeds to step 2662.

  Next, at step 2662, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the specific game in progress flag is on. If Yes in step 2662, in step 2663 the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the main game symbol has newly stopped. In the case of Yes in step 2663, in step 2664, the background effect display control means SM23 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the stay stage management counter. Next, in step 2666, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the stay stage management counter and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 2666, in step 2668, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the specific game end flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b. Next, in step 2669, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a predetermined value (20) in the after-specified-game counter, and proceeds to step 2670. Incidentally, even in the case of No in step 2663 or step 2666, the processing shifts to step 2670.

  Next, in step 2670, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the stay stage management counter, and the counter value falls within the range of the break 3 (the break is in the case where “40 ≧ stay stage management counter value ≧ 21”. It is determined whether or not 3). In the case of Yes in step 2670, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the stay stage management counter in step 2671 and the counter value is the break switching value (the stay stage management counter value when the stage break is newly switched, In this example, it is determined whether or not "60", "40", and "20". If the stay stage counter value is "40", the process of step 2671 is not executed because the result of step 2670 is No. In the case of Yes in step 2671, the background effect display control means SM 23 determines in step 2672 whether or not there is a planned trigger hold to be digested at the next division and to be a big hit For example, when the stay stage management counter value is “60” and the hold in the third digest order is a big hit trigger hold, the stay stage of the segment 2 is “special probability change stage”. Become No). If Yes in step 2672, in step 2674, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the "probable change stage" as the stay stage, and shifts to the next process {the process of step 3200 (second change 1)}. Also, in the case of No at step 2671, the process proceeds to step 2674 to set the “probable change stage” as the stay stage. In addition, if Step 2670 or Step 2672 is No, in Step 2676 the background effect display control means SM23 determines that “special probability change stage (if the reach change is executed, the change becomes a big hit at Step 2676. The stay stage to be deterministic is set, and the process proceeds to the next process {the process of step 3200 (the second modification 1)}. As described above, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the stay stage has the "certain change stage" and the "special probability change stage", and in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, the basic is The stay stage is configured to transition as “division 1 = probability stage → division 2 = probability stage → division 3 = special probability stage → division 4 = probability stage”. In addition, in "60" or "20" where the stay stage management counter value is a section switch value, the "probability change stage" is originally set as the stay stage, but the trigger that is scheduled to be a big hit in the hold If there is a hold, the "special probability change stage" is set as the stay stage (after that, reach effect is executed with a symbol change relating to trigger hold and becomes a big hit). Although not shown, the "probable variation stage" and the "specially probable variation stage" are configured to be recognized as different stages from the viewpoint of the player (the appearance is largely different).

  If NO in step 2662, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b in step 2678 to determine whether or not the specific game end flag is on. . In the case of step 2678 Yes, in step 2678, the background effect display control means SM23 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the counter after the specific game. Next, in step 2682, the background effect display control means SM 23 refers to the counter after specific game and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 2682, the background effect display control means SM 23 turns off the specific game end flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM 23 b in step 2684, and proceeds to step 2686. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2682, the process proceeds to step 2686. Next, in step 2686, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the stay stage as “the stage after the probability change end (when the probability variation gaming state is ended by the number of times of fluctuation of the main gaming symbol), the main timing The period until the variation of the game pattern ends is set to stay at a different stay stage from the “normal stage”) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process {the process of step 3200 (second change 1)}. On the other hand, if No in step 2678, in step 2688 the background effect display control means SM23 sets the "normal stage" as the stay stage, and shifts to the next processing {processing of step 3200 (second modification 1)}. .

  Here, the upper right part of the figure is a stay stage determination table. The detailed description of this table is omitted because it is described above. Thus, in the first modification from the second embodiment, there are two types of stay stages that can stay in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, and can stay in the non-probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state Two types of stay stages are provided.

  Next, FIG. 62 is a flowchart of initialization command transmission determination processing according to the subroutine of step 3200 (second modification 1) in FIG. 57 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 3202, the drawing hold information display control unit SM 22 refers to the prefetch related information temporary storage unit SM 26 b to determine whether a trigger hold relating to a skewing hold prefetch has newly occurred. In the case of Yes in step 3202, the process proceeds to step 3212. On the other hand, if No in step 3202, in step 3203, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the big hit symbol has newly stopped. In the case of Yes in step 3203, the process moves to step 3212. On the other hand, if the result of step 3203 is No, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11 b in step 3204, and determines whether or not the current time shortening gaming state is present. If YES in step 3204, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11 b in step 3206 to determine whether or not a hold on the second main game side has newly occurred. . In the case of Yes in step 3206, the process proceeds to step 3212. On the other hand, if No in step 3206, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11 b in step 3208 and determines whether or not there is a hold on the second main game side. It is determined (if No in this processing, the second main game hold has not newly occurred, but the second main game hold already exists). If Yes in step 3208, in step 3210, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the pre-reading related information temporary storage means SM 26b and determines whether or not the pre-reading effect on the first main game side is being executed. Do. If Yes in step 3210, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b in step 3211 to determine whether it is the hold occurrence timing or the hold termination timing. In the case of Yes at step 3211, the process proceeds to step 3212. Note that, in the process of step 3211, it may be determined whether or not it is the hold occurrence timing, or only whether it is the hold settlement timing may be determined.

  Next, in step 3212, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets "no change in hold" as the hold display mode on the first main game side (the command for initializing the above-mentioned hold display mode is the sub-sub control Command will be sent to the unit SS). Next, in step 3214, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets the hold number on the first main game side (a command will be sent to the sub sub control unit SS), and the next process (step 2300) Move to Also in the case of No at step 3204, step 3208, step 3210 or step 3211, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2300). As described above, in the first modification from the second embodiment, in the case where the skewed holding pre-reading effect is executed as the pre-reading effect, the pre-reading effect is "white" whose pending display mode is the initial display mode at the time of pre-reading Since it is configured to change to a skewer holding display mode during execution of the prefetching effect, when the prefetching effect is executed, as a command relating to the hold display mode on the first main game side It is configured to set “no change in hold” (a command for initializing the above-mentioned hold display mode will be transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS). As described above, in the first modification of the second embodiment, (1) occurrence of a trigger suspension related to a skewing suspension prefetched presentation effect that is a prefetching effect that can be executed on hold transition at a timing later than the trigger suspension occurrence time Timing, (2) Big hit start timing, (3) Timing when the second main game hold occurred in the non-time shortening game state, (4) Non-time shortening game state and the second main game hold does not exist and the second (1) The hold display mode is initialized at the timing when the hold occurs or the hold is digested in a situation where the pre-reading effect on the main game side is not executed (the initialization command is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS) In addition, as the initialization command, it is configured to set a command related to the hold display mode of "no change in hold" and a command related to the number of holds on the first main game side. Further, in the first modification example from the second embodiment, initialization is performed when a trigger hold relating to a skewed hold pre-reading effect that is a pre-display effect of a hold that does not change the display mode of the hold when trigger hold occurs. While the command is set, the initialization command is configured not to be set when a trigger hold relating to a pre-reading effect such as a huge hold pre-reading effect that is a pending pre-reading effect in which the display mode of the hold changes when trigger hold occurs. (At the time of trigger pending occurrence related to skewed pending look-ahead effect, the pending display mode becomes “white”.) The sending condition of the initialization command is not limited to this, for example, a big hit with a small number of rounds (for example, 2R, and the big hit symbol of the big fluctuation to move to the probability fluctuation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state after the big hit end You may be configured not to send the initialization command at the time of stop (for example, send the initialization command at the time of the big hit of 4R or more, the stop of the big hit symbol related to the big hit that can substantially acquire the game ball) If a hit is provided, the initialization command may not be sent when the small hit symbol is stopped, and if so, (1) it is not time to send the initialization command as a condition No big deal in the game state reduced jackpot at the big hit according to the big hit, stop at the small hit symbol non-time reduction game state, etc. and apply only when it is a specific game state, (2) above initialization command Even when the condition for not transmitting is satisfied, the initialization command is transmitted, but the sub-sub control unit SS ignores it even if the command is received (it is out of range), It is also good. By configuring in this way, for example, when the big hit of 2R is executed, the pending display mode immediately before the big hit and the pending display mode immediately after the big hit end are the same, but the big hit of 15R is When executed, it is possible to configure so that the pending display mode immediately before the big hit and the pending display mode immediately after the big hit end are different.

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment, in the gaming machine having a specification such that the probability fluctuation gaming state can be ended by the number of times of fluctuation of the main gaming symbol, the probability fluctuation When the gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, it is configured to shift to the limited frequency state and to switch the stay stage and the limited frequency table to be referred to for each change of the main game symbol of a predetermined number of times. In addition to such a configuration, when the limited frequency table 1 is referred to, the jackpot expectation at the time of reach fluctuation occurrence is about 50%, and when the limited frequency table 2 is referred to, it is determined that the big hit occurs when the reach fluctuation occurs. By configuring so as to be, the player can enjoy the specific game (probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state) without getting bored. In addition, it determines that the command concerning the other pre-reading effect is out of range at the time of huge pre-reading effect execution which can not be executed redundantly with other pre-reading effects, and executes the fourth presiding display For example, the fourth display order of suspension is command content out of the range because the suspension change is not executed, and the command to the sub display control mode related to the suspension display mode and the variation suggestion display mode suitable for the game property By setting the content and command transmission mode, it is possible to set the command content and command transmission mode more suitable for the specification of the gaming machine.

(Modification 2 from the second embodiment)
Here, in the first modified example from the second embodiment, when the second main game hold occurs during the execution of the hold prereading effect of the first main game side, it is determined that the situation is irregular and the current main game is being executed. Although all of the processing relating to the reserved pre-reading effect on the first main game side is cleared, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to make the processing to be executed different depending on the type of pre-reading effect. Therefore, such a configuration will be described in detail as only a modification from the second modification of the second embodiment as a second modification of the second embodiment.

  Next, FIG. 63 is a flowchart of first main game winning combination prefetching determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2150 in FIG. 37 in the second modification from the second embodiment. The change point from the second embodiment is step 2186 (the second modification), that is, after the pending continuation counter SM 22 c is reset (zero clear) in step 2180 (the second), step 2186 (the second modification). ), The pending read giant effect execution possibility determination unit SM26k refers to the flag area of the prefetch related information temporary storage unit SM26b, and determines whether the giant pending read ahead execution flag is off. In step 2186 (the second modification 2), in the case of Yes, the process proceeds to step 2182 (the second), and in the case of No, the process relating to the pre-reading effect is initialized, and the next process (the process of step 2112) Migrate to

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment, the giant hold that is a prefetching effect that does not affect the effect even if the second main game hold occurs during execution. At the time of execution of the pre-read effect, the huge hold pre-read effect is continuously displayed even if the second main game hold occurs, while the second main game hold at the time of the pre-play effect of the first main game side other than the huge hold pre-read effect When the occurrence of the second main game hold occurs by judging that it is an irregular situation, and by configuring all processing pertaining to the hold pre-reading effect of the first main game side in execution to be clear Also in the case where it is done, it is possible to execute the processing according to the type of pre-reading effect being executed.

  In addition, it is comprised similarly to the example 2 of a change from 2nd Embodiment, and the 2nd main game reservation arises while execution of pending change look-ahead effect (for example, huge pending look-ahead effect) which is a pre-reading effect which changes a pending display mode. Even though the execution of the pending change look-ahead effect continues (the pending display mode after the pending change is maintained), the second main game hold occurred during the execution of the background change look-ahead effect which is a pre-reading effect that changes the background effect In this case, the process related to the background change look-ahead effect may be cleared (the hold change look-ahead effect and the background change look-ahead effect are assumed as the read-out effects on the first main game side). Similarly, when the second main game hold occurs during execution of the hold change look-ahead effect, which is a pre-reading effect of changing the hold display mode, clears the processing relating to the hold change look-ahead effect, and changes the background effect. When the second main game hold occurs during execution of the background change look-ahead effect which is the pre-read effect, the execution of the background change look-ahead effect may be continued.

  Note that with the reserve incidental information (also referred to as incidental information or incidental image) in this example, it corresponds to the effect display corresponding to the hold display displayed in the vicinity of the hold display and the hold display displayed overlapping the hold display. The effect display corresponding to the hold display displayed in the hold display (for example, “Heat” is displayed in the hold display), and the change indication displayed in the vicinity of the change suggestion display Corresponding effect indication, effect indication corresponding to the variation indication displayed overlapping the variation indication, and effect indication corresponding to the variation indication displayed in the variation indication (for example, All the "Heat" is displayed in the fluctuation indication.

  Note that the pending display and the pending incidental information in this example are both (1) changeable (attached) with an action (such as pending advance presentation effects) (the contents of the action vary depending on whether or not to accompany) In such a case, the type of action that can be executed may be configured to be different between change and incidental), (2) difference between pending change action and incidental incidental action (3) The pending change action and / or the pending incidental information attached action may fail (do not change pending, not accompanied by the pending incidental information), but the action may be executed again after the failure. (4) In the case where a plurality of actions (hold change action or hold incidental information incidental action) are executed in one or more times of symbol variation, the plurality of actions are performed The actions may be different actions or may be the same action. (5) A plurality of actions (hold change action or hold incidental information attachment action) with one or more symbol changes When executed, the jackpot expectation of the multiple actions and / or the action success expectation {or the degree of change when the action is successful (eg, change from “white” to “blue” or “white” Change degree from “red” to “red”, rank up degree such as 1 step up or 2 steps up)} may be respectively different or identical (action failure probability is also executed action) (Each may be different depending on the type of). In addition, in one pattern change, (1) rank up multiple stages by one action (If it is "White", "Blue", "Red" from the order of low hitting expectation, "White" → "Red" 2 ranks up), (2) Rank up one rank by one action, (3) Rank up several ranks by multiple actions (eg total of 2 actions) (2) rank up in 2), (4) The configuration of (1) or the configuration of (2) is applied to the suspension display, and the configurations of (1) to (3) apply to the change indication. (5) The configuration of the above (1) to (3) may be executed a plurality of times for the fluctuation suggestion display {for example, (2) is performed after the (1), and after the (1) Etc.), etc. may be configured.

  In addition, as exemplified in this example, the variation time determined by the number of reservations at the time of determination of the variation time of the main gaming symbol may be different, and the number of reservations at the time of determination of the variation time is three The variation time of the game symbol is 3 seconds (this symbol variation is designated as symbol variation A), and the variation time of the main game symbol when the number of reservations at the time of determination of the variation time is one is 11 seconds (the symbol variation is symbol variation B In the case of (1), it is possible to execute an action (hold change action or reserve incidental information incidental action) with the symbol change A and the symbol change B, but with the symbol change A and the symbol change B, the action (hold The mode of change action or reserve incidental information incidental action is different (action A in the case of symbol variation A, action B in the case of symbol variation B), (2) symbol variation B in execution and remaining Fluctuation time is 3 seconds Pending change upon but the action A is not executed even if the trigger hold has occurred the trigger hold occurs when a top is feasible, it may be configured. In addition, also when configured in this way, it may be configured such that the next change is started so that the pending change (or the change of the change indication mode) can be executed thereafter.

(Modification of pending look-ahead effect)
Regarding the effect mode of the pre-reading effect which can be executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, various effect modes can be applied besides the configuration described above. Then, the example of a change of the production | presentation aspect of pre-reading production which is not mentioned above is explained in full detail below. In the following example, all the suspension not specifically stated is the suspension of the first main game side (the suspension displayed on the upper left of the effect display device SG), and in what order of digestion The pending display mode and the like are merely examples, and there is no problem even if they are changed.

(Pending look-ahead effect change example 1)
First, FIG. 64 is a modification example 1 of the pre-hold presentation effect. First, in the top row, the number of reservations is three, and the decorative symbol is fluctuating. After that in the same change, penguin as the first hold change effect (the hold change expectation degree as the first hold change effect (if the hold change expectation is low, there may be cases where the action does not cause a hold change, or the hold does not change) Is relatively low, and / or the average value of the jackpot expectation of the reserved display mode after change is relatively low, and in this example, “penguin” appears. Next, in the same change, "Penguin" is a weak effect as the second hold change effect (the hold change expectation degree as the second hold change effect (if the hold change expectation degree is low, the hold change may not occur even if the action is triggered Or, there is a relatively large number of cases where there is no change in the hold) and / or the average value of the jackpot expectation of the change display mode is relatively low, and in this example, the star is small. Run. Next, the hold display (the hold display for the third digestion order) that has hit the weak presentation changes from “white” to “blue”. Note that depending on the action, it may be configured that the change on hold becomes definite. Specifically, the retention change expectation is relatively low when an action for penguins occurs, and the retention change becomes definite when an action for sheep appears, or a star If an action that causes (small) occurs occurs, the degree of expectation for pending change is relatively low, and if an action that causes a star (large) occurs, such pending action becomes definite. You may configure it.

  Next, in the second from the upper row, after "Penguin" appears as the first hold change effect, "Penguin" is strongly produced as the second hold change effect with the same change (the hold change as the second hold change effect Hold change effect, which is relatively high in the expectation degree and / or the average value of the jackpot expectation degree of the hold display mode after the change, and in this example, star) is executed. Next, the hold display (the hold display for the third digestion order) that has hit the strong presentation changes from “white” to “green”.

  Next, in the third from the upper row, the number of reservations is three, and in the state that the decoration pattern is changing, "sheep" as the first suspension change effect (the suspension change expectation degree as the first suspension change effect and And / or the average value of the jackpot expectation degree of the pending display mode after the change is a relatively high pending change presentation, and in this example, “sheep” appears. Next, with the same change, “sheep” is weak as the second hold change production (as the second hold change production, the average value of the jackpot expectation of the hold change expectation and / or the hold display mode after change is relatively relative) In the present example, the star small) is executed. Next, the hold display (the hold display for the third digestion order) that has hit the weak presentation changes from “white” to “yellow”.

  Next, at the lowermost level, after "sheep" appears as the first hold change effect, the "sheep" is strongly produced as the second hold change effect with the same change (the hold change expectation as the second hold change effect And / or the average value of the jackpot expectation degree of the pending display mode after the change is a relatively high pending change presentation, and in this example, star) is executed. Next, the hold display (the hold display for the third digestion order) that has hit the strong presentation changes from “white” to “red”.

  As described above, in FIG. 64, two on-hold change effects of the first on-hold change effect and the second on-hold change effect are provided as the on-hold change effect, and the type of the on-hold change effect (or combination of types) The degree of expectation and / or the tendency of the pending change content may be configured to be different. In addition, the big hit expectation degree which concerns on a pending | holding display mode is an order of "red"> "green"> "yellow"> "blue" from high order. In addition, in the case of the production | presentation mode of the production | presentation aspect in which an object collides toward a pending | holding display like 2nd pending | temporary change presentation as shown to the figure, the display position of a trigger pending | holding The trajectory of the object is different (the effect pattern is different). In addition, a success pattern and a failure pattern may be provided for the first hold change effect and the second hold change effect, and when the first hold change effect is successful, the second hold change effect is executed, and the second hold change effect is successful. Then, the pending change may be performed. In addition, in this example, although it illustrated about pending change production, it is not limited to this, but it is the 1st concerned change suggestion display change production and the 1st as the change suggestion display change production concerned (presentation which the said change suggestion display mode changes) (2) The variation suggestion display effect may be provided so that the tendency of the jackpot expectation and / or the pending change content may differ depending on the type of the variation suggestion display change effect.

(Pending look-ahead effect change example 2)
Next, FIG. 65 shows a change of the pre-hold presentation effect. First, in the top row, trigger hold occurs while the decorative symbol changes, and while the fourth hold on the digest order is trigger hold, the trigger display hold mode is treasure chest hold ((1) All holds are on the 1st main game hold). After one change, the change of the decorative symbol is ended, and the lost symbol is stopped as a stop symbol of the corresponding symbol change. After 2 changes, that is, the change suggestion display mode becomes a "treasure box" display with a symbol change related to trigger suspension, and an effect of opening the "treasure box" display is executed. Thereafter, in the same change, a display indicating a battle effect (which is a reach effect) appears out of the opened "treasure box" display, and thereafter a reach effect is executed.

  Next, at the lowermost level, trigger hold occurs while the decorative symbol changes, and while the fourth hold on the digest order is trigger hold, the trigger display hold mode is treasure chest hold After one change from the state, the change of the decorative symbol ends, and the big hit symbol stops as a stop symbol of the symbol change. After that, the display mode of trigger suspension changes from “treasure box” to “white” in response to the stop of the big hit symbol with the same fluctuation (information indicating that trigger suspension is also deleted).

  As described above, in FIG. 65, the treasure chest reserve is displayed as a display mode of the trigger reserve when the reserve change effect is executed, and the treasure chest reserve is a symbol variation related to the trigger reserve. It is comprised so that it may be concealed what kind of display aspect will be as the said fluctuation | variation suggestion display aspect until it starts. In other words, the jackpot expectation degree of the symbol variation related to the trigger suspension is concealed until the symbol variation of the trigger suspension is started. In addition, although the treasure chest hold may be configured to be opened before the symbol variation related to the trigger hold is started, the “treasure box” display is also displayed as the symbol variation related to the trigger hold when configured as such. It is desirable to configure so that the rate of opening before symbol variation relating to trigger suspension starts is lower than the rate of opening of. In addition to opening the "treasure box" display, the color of the "treasure box" display may be changed, or the "treasure box" display may be displayed erratically, in which case, something from the "treasure box" display If there is a high probability of appearance (if there is no output), or if the suspension displayed in the "treasure box" display is digested, the variation indication display mode becomes a high hit probability It may be configured to be easy. In addition, although not shown in the same figure, it may be configured to suggest the content of the notice effect after the “treasure box” display is opened by the hold display other than the trigger hold during the pre-reading effect execution (for example, big hit It may be heard that a highly anticipated advance announcement is performed). In addition, as shown in the same figure, when the jackpot is started or when the gaming state has transitioned, all hold display modes including trigger hold are “white” (such as when hold-on effect is not executed) (Display mode) (the execution of the pre-reading effect is also finished). In addition, when the second main game hold occurs, in the symbol change related to the second main game hold, the pre-reading effect such as the hold change is not executed. In addition, as a type of the hold display mode and the variation suggestion display mode, a first type mode which is a display mode which can be hold changed during the hold display, and a second type mode which is a display mode which does not change the hold during the hold display. When provided, the first type mode includes both the pending display mode and the variation suggestion display mode, for example, the indication of “red” in the pending indication and the indication of “red” in the variation indication are somewhat Even when there is a difference in shape (difference in size or the like), the same may be considered.

(Pending look-ahead effect change example 3)
Next, FIG. 66 shows a change of the pre-hold presentation effect. First, in the top row, the number of reservations is three, and the decorative symbol is fluctuating. After that, with the same change, the sword (small) stabbing effect (the pending change expectation degree as the pending change effect and / or the jackpot expected degree of the pending display mode after the change) against the pending display which is the second digestive order as the prefetching effect The holding change effect with a relatively low average value is executed, and the effect is successful, and the sword (small) is stuck in the holding display mode (stuck as holding incidental information). After that, with the same change, the suspension display mode of the suspension where the sword is stuck changes from “white” to “blue”.

  Next, in the second from the upper row, the sword (small) stabbing effect (the pending change expectation degree as the pending change presentation and / or the pending display mode after change) with respect to the pending display which is the second digested order as the prefetching effect The average value of the jackpot expectation degree of is relatively low (hold change effect) is executed, the effect fails, and the sword (small) does not pierce the hold display mode. Thereafter, in the same change, the pending display mode does not change because the sword does not pierce.

  Next, in the third from the upper row, the sword (Large) stabbing effect (the pending change expectation degree as the pending change presentation and / or the pending display mode after change) with respect to the pending display which is the second digestion order as the prefetching effect The holding change effect with a relatively high average value of the jackpot expectation is executed, the effect is successful, and the sword (large) is stuck in the holding display mode (stuck as holding accompanying information). After that, with the same change, the suspension display mode of the suspension where the sword is stuck changes from “white” to “red”.

  Next, in the lowermost stage, the sword (large) stabbing effect (the pending change expectation degree as the pending change presentation and / or the big hit of the pending display mode after the change) with respect to the pending display which is the second digestive order as the prefetching effect The holding change effect with a relatively high average value of the expectation is executed, the effect fails, and the sword (large) does not pierce the holding display mode. After that, the pending display mode does not change because the sword does not thrust at the same change, but the effect of informing the player that the sword (large) effect is almost deterministic (successful) Therefore, when it fails (does not pierce), special effects are treated (so-called premier effects), and it becomes definite that the symbol variation related to trigger suspension becomes a big hit. By configuring in this way, even if the sword (large) effect that the big hit expectation level becomes the high expectation level fails, it is determined that the symbol variation related to the trigger suspension at the time of the failure will be the lost variation It can be configured not to be.

  Thus, in FIG. 66, two pending change effects of the sword (small) and the sword (large) are provided, and the probability that the sword (large) is more successful than the sword (small) The probability of sticking is high, and the probability of becoming a big hit when the rendering is successful (when sticking) is high. In addition, it is not limited to this, for example, a sword (large) has a higher probability of success in directing than a sword (small) {The probability of becoming a big hit is the same, the direction of the sword (small) May be higher than the sword (large), etc.) or the sword (large) has a higher probability of becoming a big hit than the sword (small) {the probability that the rendering is successful is the same, the sword (Small) may be higher than the sword (large), etc. In addition, the sword (large) is more difficult to succeed than the sword (small), but if successful, the sword (large) has a higher expectation for a big hit than the sword (small) (a high hit is a high expectation) It may be configured to be easily changed to the display mode. In other words, the sword (small) is more likely to succeed than the sword (large), but if successful, the sword (small) has lower jackpot expectation than the sword (large) (big hit expectation is lower) It may be configured to easily change to the hold display mode.

(Pending look-ahead effect change example 4)
Next, FIG. 67 shows a modification example 4 of the pre-hold presentation effect. First, in the top row, the number of reservations is three, and the holding frame (display that surrounds four holding displays, and the holding frame is configured to be actionable) is displayed in the normal display mode. It is done. After that, with the same change, the pending deposit action (small) is executed (the pending submission glows discreetly). After that, with the same change, the retention of the third digestion order changes from "white" to "blue".

  Next, in the second from the upper row, the number of reservations is three, and the holding frame (display that surrounds four holding displays, and the holding frame is configured to be actionable) is a normal display mode It is displayed in. After that, with the same change, the pending deposit action (large) is executed (the pending submission glows violently). After that, with the same change, the third digestion order changes from "white" to "red".

  As described above, in FIG. 67, two suspension change effects of the suspension frame action (small) and the suspension frame action (large) are provided, and the pattern variation is performed by executing the suspension frame action. Are configured to be deterministic that the pending change is performed. In addition, it is configured that the display with the big hit expectation degree is more easily changed when the holding frame action (large) is executed than when the holding frame action (small) is performed. In addition, it is not limited to such a structure, Even if a holding frame action is performed, you may provide the case (what is called gasse effect) which does not change holding | maintenance. In addition, when the holding limit action is executed, the variation suggestion display mode may be changed. In addition, with regard to the pending frame action, even if the action is executed, it indicates the possibility of a change in the pending display mode remaining in the symbol variation in the symbol variation after the action is executed. Good (may be configured to be deterministic).

(Pending look-ahead effect change example 5)
Next, FIG. 68 shows a modification 5 of the pre-hold presentation effect. First, in the top row, the number of reservations is three. After that, with the same change, two options of "sheep" and "penguin" are displayed as the reservation incidental information (the advance notice effect relating to the pre-reading effect displayed in the vicinity of the hold display). After that, "sheep" is selected among the options of the reserve incidental information with the same variation, and the "sheep" executes an action on the effect display device SG. The big hit expectation of the pre-reading effect is relatively low.

  Next, in the second from the upper row, "sheep", "Penguin", and "Hiyoko" as supplementary incidental information (preliminary effects pertaining to the pre-reading effect displayed in the vicinity of the pending display) under the situation where the number of reservations is three The three choices are displayed. After that, “penguin” is selected from the options of the reserve incidental information with the same change, and the “penguin” executes an action on the effect display device SG. The big hit expectation of the pre-reading effect is relatively high.

  Next, in the lowermost row, under the situation where the number of reservations is three, one option of only "sheep" is displayed as the reservation incidental information (the advance notice effect relating to the pre-reading effect displayed in the vicinity of the hold display). After that, "sheep" is selected among the options of the reserve incidental information with the same variation, and the "sheep" executes an action on the effect display device SG. Here, since the preselected effect to be selected is basically an effect to be selected from a plurality of options, it is determined that if there is only one selected, it will be a big hit as the premier effect. It is configured to be

  Thus, in FIG. 68, when there are a plurality of options to be displayed as the reservation incidental information, the jackpot expectation is higher as the number of options is larger, and the case is only one option. It is configured that it becomes definite that the said symbol variation will be a big hit. In addition, all options may be implemented, eg sheep are configured to indicate the execution of simulated continuous movement, penguins are recommended to carry out super reach, and chicks are suggested to carry out other notices (step-up notice etc.) You may be comprised so that the production | presentation corresponding to the said option may be performed by the said symbol change by the part by which each option was performed.

(Pending look-ahead effect change example 6)
Next, FIG. 69 shows a modification of pending pre-reading effect 6. First, in the top row, the number of reservations is three, and the decorative symbol is fluctuating. Thereafter, with the same change, the change of the decorative symbol stops, and the stop symbol of the change and the special symbol (the stop symbol of the decorative symbol serving as an opportunity to execute the pending change effect) stop. After that, with the same change, the display mode of the retention of the third digestion order changes from “white” to “blue”, triggered by the stop of the special symbol.

  Thus, in FIG. 69, the hold change effect is executed by stopping (decision stop display or temporary stop display) the special symbol that is the stop symbol for executing the hold change effect as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. It will be. In addition, the execution timing of the said pending | holding change presentation should just be performed from the stop timing of a special symbol to the start timing of the following fluctuation. Also, as a configuration example in which the hold change is executed by stopping the special symbol, for example, it is determined that the special symbol does not stop before the trigger hold occurs as the effect content relating to a certain symbol variation When being, it may be possible to replace the effect contents with the effect contents at which the special symbol is stopped due to the trigger suspension occurring. In addition, as substitution conditions in such a case, the symbol variation currently being executed is not a particular symbol variation (for example, symbol variation that becomes a big hit), and from a predetermined timing (for example, a timing one second before the variation stop) Also, it may be configured to be replaced when it is the previous timing.

(Pending look-ahead effect change example 7)
Next, FIG. 70 shows a change example 7 of the pre-hold presentation effect. First, in the top row, the number of reservations is three, and the decorative symbol is fluctuating. After that, "Penguin" is displayed as the change indication on the change indication as the change indication on the same indication, as the indication indicating the change indication on the change indication (the indication on the change indication on the change indication is not pending because the indication on the change indication is the change indication). An action to fly the "blue" ball (in the same display mode as the hold display) is executed. Thereafter, in the same variation, the display mode of the variation indication with the "blue" ball changes from "white" to "blue". Thereafter, with the same change, an action is performed in which the “sheep” flies the ball of “red” (display mode similar to the hold display) toward the change indication as the change indication indication. Thereafter, in the same variation, the display mode of the variation indication with the “red” ball changes from “blue” to “red”.

  Thus, in FIG. 70, a plurality of holding change presentation and holding changes can be performed in a single symbol fluctuation period. It should be noted that there may be a case where the hold change does not occur even when the hold change effect is executed, and in such a configuration, for example, the hold change is more likely to occur as the number of executions of the hold change effect increases. You may Specifically, when three holding change effects are executed in one symbol change, the third holding change effect is the holding change expectation degree (or the holding change expectation than the first holding change effect) You may comprise so that the big hit expectation degree of the pending | holding display aspect after a change may become high.

(Pending look-ahead effect change example 8)
Next, FIG. 71 shows a change example 8 of the pre-hold presentation effect. First, in the top row, the number of reservations is three, and the hold of the third digest order is the trigger hold, and the display mode of the trigger hold is the rotation hold (hold display is rotated and displayed) It has become. Here, the rotation hold is (1) a hold with relatively low jackpot expectation (a hold with a jackpot expectation lower than "blue" unless a hold change further from here), and (2) other This is a pending display mode in which the pending change probability is relatively higher than the pending state of the display mode, in other words, a pending that suggests the possibility of changing to a pending with the “blue” pending jackpot expectation. After 2 changes (two new holdings are occurring), a strong background effect as a background effect (a part of the background effects to be executed triggered by the trigger holding being triggered) is expected to be a big hit Background rendering (which has a relatively high degree) is performed, and the display mode of the trigger hold remains as the rotation hold. After 1 change, the execution of strong background effect is maintained, and the change suggestion display mode becomes rotation display in the symbol change related to the trigger hold (the display change of the trigger hold is the rotation display and the symbol change related to the trigger hold) Because it was started).

  Next, in the second from the upper row, after 2 variations of the symbol variation in which the rotation suspension occurred (two new suspension occured), the strong background effect is executed as the background effect, and the display mode of the trigger suspension is Change from rotation hold to red hold. After 1 change, the execution of strong background effect is maintained, and the variation indication display mode becomes “red” display in the symbol change related to trigger hold (trigger hold with display mode of trigger hold “red” display) Because the symbol variation related to has been started).

  Next, in the third from the upper row, after 2 changes of the symbol variation in which rotation suspension occurred (two suspension occurs newly), weak background effect as a background effect (trigger suspension is occurring) Among the background effects to be executed as a trigger, the background effect having a relatively low jackpot expectation due to being executed is executed, and the display mode of trigger suspension is still rotation suspension. After 1 fluctuation, the execution of weak background effect is maintained, and the fluctuation indication display mode becomes rotation display in the symbol fluctuation related to trigger suspension (The display fluctuation of trigger suspension is the rotation display and the symbol fluctuation related to trigger suspension) Because it was started).

  Next, in the lowermost stage, after 2 changes of the symbol variation in which rotation suspension occurred (two suspension occurs newly), weak background effect as a background effect (triggered that trigger suspension occurs) Among the background effects to be performed, the background effect (whose expectation for jackpot is relatively low due to being performed is relatively low) is performed, and the display mode of trigger suspension changes from rotation suspension to blue suspension. After 1 fluctuation, the execution of weak background effect is maintained, and the fluctuation indication display mode becomes "blue" display in the symbol fluctuation related to trigger suspension (trigger suspension is still displayed with "blue" display mode of trigger suspension) Because the symbol variation related to has been started).

  As described above, in FIG. 71, weak background effect and strong background effect having a high probability of big hit expectation and / or rotation suspension change with high probability of holding change are executable as background effect. . As a big hit expectation, "high background effect is executed and rotation hold is not changed from high to low> Strong background effect is performed and rotation hold is changed to hold> Weak background effect is performed and rotation hold is changed "Weak background effect is executed and rotation hold is not changed." If strong background effect is performed and rotation hold is not changed, strong background effect is changed by rotation change. Since it is an effect that informs the player that it is almost definite, when fluctuation related to trigger suspension is started while rotation is suspended, it becomes special effect (so-called premier effect), and symbol fluctuation related to trigger suspension Is determined to be a big hit. In addition, when there is a rotation hold, the rotation hold changes on the basis of whether or not the pre-reading effect other than the hold change (the background effect illustrated in this example, the reservation incidental information, etc.) is being executed. The proportions are configured to be different. In addition, when the rotation hold is displayed, as the ratio of which configuration shown in the figure, "the third from the top → the fourth from the top or the second from the top → the top" It is preferable that the first to the first.

(Pending look-ahead effect change example 9)
Next, FIG. 72 shows a change of the pre-hold presentation effect. The gaming machine shown in FIG. 72 has a sub input button SB which is a member by which a player can execute effects. First, in the upper row, the number of reservations is three, the third suspension order is in the trigger suspension mode, and the display mode of the trigger suspension mode is rotation suspension (the suspension display is being rotated and displayed) It has become. Thereafter, with the same change, the long press of the sub input button SB is executed, and the display mode of the trigger hold changes from the rotation hold to the “red” hold. Then, after 3 changes, it becomes a change related to trigger suspension, the change indication display mode becomes "red" display, and reach effect will be executed.

  Next, in the lower part, the display mode of the trigger suspension is maintained with the rotation suspension, without operating the sub input button SB in the symbol variation in which the rotation suspension has occurred. After that, while the sub input button SB is not operated during the second change, the hold display mode of the trigger hold changes to the rotation hold or “red” hold by executing the hold change presentation. Then, after 1 fluctuation, the fluctuation indication display mode becomes “red” display due to the fluctuation relating to the trigger suspension, and the reach effect will be executed.

  As described above, in FIG. 72, the rotation hold changes to “red” hold in both the upper and lower stages, but the predetermined operation of the sub input button SB by the player (in this example, long press) ) Is configured so that the display of the pending change result may be accelerated. If the hold change is not scheduled to be executed (if the change related to trigger hold is scheduled to start while the rotation hold is on), the hold change is executed even if a predetermined operation of the sub input button SB is performed. It is configured not to be.

(Pending look-ahead effect change example 10)
Next, FIG. 73 shows a modification 10 of the pre-pending presentation effect. First, the number of reservations is three. After that, with the same change, an action is performed in which "Penguin" fires on all the pending indications as the pending change effect. After that, with the same change, the suspension display mode of the first digestion order suspension changes from “white” to “blue”, and the suspension display mode of the third digestion order suspension changes from “white” to “red” Do.

  Thus, in FIG. 73, a plurality of suspension display modes of suspension can be changed by execution of one suspension change effect (pending change action). There is no problem in changing the display position of the changing hold, the display mode changing, and the changing number of holdings. In addition, as a configuration in which a plurality of suspension display modes of suspension can be changed by execution of one suspension change presentation (pending change action), for example, a plurality of (for example, 2) suspension suspension is triggered by the occurrence of trigger suspension. While the display mode changes, a specific background effect (for example, the hold change frequent occurrence zone) extends over a plurality of changes corresponding to a change in the hold display mode (two pattern changes because the hold display mode changes 2) The process may be performed, and the hold display mode may be changed again during the background effect execution (the pattern variation serving as the specific background effect may be extended by the number of the hold display mode changed again). In addition, the action 1 and the action 2 (for example, an action in which a penguin appears and a frame change action) may simultaneously occur, and the pending display mode may be ranked up by two or more stages by the simultaneously generated action. Moreover, you may apply not only to the said fluctuation | variation suggestion display aspect but the pending | holding display aspect.

(Pending look-ahead effect change example 11)
Next, FIG. 74 shows a change of the pre-hold presentation effect 11. First, under the situation where the number of reservations is two, the decorative symbol is fluctuating, and the second retention order suspension is triggered suspension. After that, with the same change, the change of the decoration pattern becomes reach change. After that, with the same change, as the stop symbol of the change of the decorative symbol, the left stop symbol and the right stop symbol stop at the same "6" symbol as the reach change, and the middle stop symbol is the special symbol "change" Stop at the symbol. After that, with the same change, triggered by the stop of the "change" symbol that is the special symbol, the pending change effect is executed, and the pending display mode of the trigger pending changes from "white" to "red".

  As described above, in FIG. 74, the reach change (reach effect) is executed, and as a result of the reach change (reach effect), the prefetch effect and the pending change are triggered by the stop of the special symbol suggesting a loss. Is configured to be performed. In addition, the pre-reading effect of this example is the symbol variation (the non-reach and missing symbol scheduled to be stopped due to non-reach variation and stopping of special symbol until the trigger suspension occurs). 6-8 ”may be configured to execute reach fluctuation and stop of the special symbol as described above, triggered by the occurrence of trigger hold. In addition, when configured as such, (1) the symbol variation to stop the special symbol is the symbol variation before the trigger suspension occurrence, and it is not a symbol variation having a relatively high jackpot expectation such as super reach, (2) In the case of losing after reach fluctuation and the case of losing after non-reach fluctuation, the temporary stop time may be longer in the case of losing after reach fluctuation. In addition, it may be configured to be able to execute reach variation and stopping of special symbols as described above, regardless of the variation mode before trigger hold occurrence.

(Pending look-ahead effect change example 12)
Next, FIG. 75 shows a modification example 12 of the pre-hold presentation effect. First, in the upper row, under the situation where the number of reservations is two, the second suspension order is put on hold. After that, with the same change, the pending display of trigger pending causes an action, and the treasure chest display effect (action is executed from the pending display and the effect that the treasure chest display appears) is executed. After that, with the same change, a display of "red" pending appears from the treasure box as an effect result of the treasure box effect. After that, since the result of the treasure box effect is "red" hold (due to the occurrence of "red" hold from the treasure box) in the same variation, the display mode of trigger hold changes from "white" to "red". In addition, it may be configured to cause an image (for example, an image of red paint) to be suggested to change to “red” without appearing the “red” reserved image itself from the treasure box.

  Next, in the lower part, the suspension display of trigger suspension causes an action, the treasure box display effect is executed, and in the same change, the display of “Ska” appears from the treasure box as the result result of the treasure box effect. After that, since the result of the treasure box effect is "suka" suspension (because "suka" has appeared from the treasure box) in the same variation, the display mode of the trigger suspension remains "white".

  Thus, in FIG. 75, as the pending change presentation, the pending display itself of the pending trigger causes an action (preliminary presentation effect), and whether or not the pending change occurs according to the result of the action from the pending display of the pending trigger and / or It is comprised so that the pending | holding display aspect after pending | holding change may be determined. Although the hold change display is configured to be executable by causing the hold display itself of the trigger hold to generate an action (notice effect), the present invention is not limited to this, and the change suggestion display mode may be changed. . Also, when the trigger hold pending display itself causes an action (notice effect), if the action is continuously executed over a plurality of changes, the hold change or the change suggestion display mode change is executed. It may be configured as follows.

(Pending look-ahead effect modification example 13)
Next, FIG. 76 shows a modification 13 of the pre-pending presentation effect. First, in the top row, the number of reservations is three. After that, at timing 1 which is the same fluctuation, an effect in which the penguin blows flame toward the fluctuation indication is executed as the fluctuation indication indication change effect (effect that the fluctuation indication mode may change), and the fluctuation indication The display mode changes from "white" to "blue".

  Next, in the middle stage, the number of reservations is three. Thereafter, at timing 2 which is the same fluctuation and timing after timing 1, the penguin is directed to the fluctuation indication as the fluctuation indication display effect (the effect that the fluctuation indication mode may change). The effect of emitting fire is executed, and the variation suggestion display mode changes from "white" to "yellow".

  Next, in the lowermost stage, the number of reservations is three. Thereafter, at the same timing, at the timing after the timing 1 and at the timing after the timing 2, the variation indication display change effect (the variation indication display mode may change). As the effect), an effect is produced in which the penguin blows a flame toward the indication of change indication, and the indication form of change indication changes from “white” to “red”.

  In this manner, in FIG. 76, as the pending change effect, the change indication display change effect is configured to be executable at a plurality of timings (timing 1, timing 2 and timing 3) in one symbol change. The big hit expectation is "timing 3> timing 2> timing 1" from high to low, that is, if the variation indication is changed at a later timing in one symbol variation, the big hit expectation is higher It is configured to be Further, the variation indication display mode may be configured to be changed at two or more times among the plurality of timings.

(Pending look-ahead effect change example 14)
Next, FIG. 77 shows a change example 14 of the pre-hold presentation effect. First, the number of holds is 3, and the hold of the third digest order is a trigger hold. After that, with the same change, it is the production of the contents of the treasure box discovery effect (how many treasure boxes can be found, and the number of the treasure box discovered by the effect will be accumulated and displayed as the reservation incidental information) Be and discover 3 treasure chests. After that, three treasure chests are accumulated and displayed as reserve collateral information as reserve collateral information, triggered by the fact that three treasure chests are found in the same variation. After the second change, the treasure box disclosure effect is executed, which is an effect of opening the treasure box display accumulated and displayed as the reservation additional information one by one. After that, with the same change, “red” suspension is discovered from the third open treasure box as the result of the treasure box disclosure effect (the effect result is 1st → ska, 2nd → ska, 3) First → "red" is on hold). After that, the hold display mode of the trigger hold changes from “white” to “red” in the same variation.

  As described above, in FIG. 77, a plurality of treasure boxes found by the treasure box finding effect can be displayed as reservation additional information. In addition, the contents (disclosure result) of the treasure chest display, which is the supplementary holding information, are concealed until the treasure chest disclosure effect is executed. Also, (1) execution timing of treasure box discovery effect and / or execution timing of treasure box disclosure effect exist at a plurality of timings, and a ratio at which a high display probability of big hit expectation and / or big hit expectation in treasure box disclosure effect appears (2) There are a plurality of types of treasure chest display and / or types of treasure chest display of reserved incidental information that can be found in the treasure chest finding effect, and depending on the type, the big hit expectation and / or the big hit expectation in the treasure box disclosure direct (3) There are multiple timings of execution of treasure box finding effect, and the accompanying incident information is accumulated and displayed each time the treasure box finding effect is executed. You may In addition to the pending change (the change indication of the change indication), the suggestion of the execution of the pseudo continuous change, the indication of the occurrence of the specific notice, and the indication of the big hit expectation (the indication such as "Gekiatsu" or "chance") It may be configured to be able to appear.

(Pending look-ahead effect change example 15)
Next, FIG. 78 shows a modification 15 of the pre-pending presentation effect. First, in the upper row, the number of reservations is 3, and the third reservation order is put on hold. After that, with the same change, as the sub input button operation instruction effect (effect to urge the player to operate the sub input button) sub input button A operation instruction effect (in this example, the sub input button A and the sub input There are two sub input buttons with the button B, and the effect of prompting the player to operate the sub input button A is executed. After that, the display mode of the trigger suspension changes from “white” to “blue” with the same change, triggered by the operation of the sub input button A.

  Next, in the lower part, the number of reservations is 3, and the hold of the third digest order is a trigger hold. After that, with the same variation, as sub input button operation instruction effect sub input button B operation instruction effect (in this example, has two sub input buttons of sub input button A and sub input button B as sub input button And the effect of prompting the player to operate the sub input button B is executed. After that, the display mode of the trigger suspension changes from “white” to “red” in response to the operation of the sub input button B at the same change.

  Thus, in FIG. 78, a plurality of sub input button operation instruction effects of the sub input button A operation instruction effect and the sub input button B operation instruction effect are provided as the sub input button operation instruction effect, and the big hit expectation degree Is “sub input button B operation instruction effect> sub input button A operation instruction effect”, that is, the jackpot expectation is different depending on the executed sub input button operation instruction effect. The sub input button operation instruction effect may be provided with an effect mode (so-called, Gasse effect) in which the holding change is not executed even if the player operates the sub input button, and in such a case, The generation ratio of the cassette effect may be made different depending on the sub input button operation instruction effect to be executed. Moreover, in this example, although it comprised so that a pending | holding change might be performed by sub input button operation instruction | indication production, it is not limited to this, You may comprise so that the said fluctuation | variation suggestion display aspect may change. In addition, although only the sub input button A is used as a member to be operated, it may have a plurality of pending change effects different in operation mode, for example, a single-press effect of pressing the sub input button A only once; Big hit expectation is higher in the case where there is a continuous hit effect that presses the sub input button A multiple times, and the continuous hit effect is executed than when the single hit effect is executed (or the hold change expected rate is high) , And may be configured to change to a high pending display mode with a high hit probability.

(Pending look-ahead effect change example 16)
Next, FIG. 79 shows a change example 16 of the pre-hold presentation effect. First, in the upper row, the number of reservations is 2, and the second suspension order suspension is trigger suspension. After that, in the same variation, a reel effect (two stages different from the variation result of the main gaming symbol and the variation of the decorative symbol suggested, indicating the presence or absence of the holding change) is executed. After that, with the same change, “change” on the left reel and “change” on the right reel stop as a stop symbol of the reel effect triggered by the player operating the sub input button. Thereafter, the display mode of the trigger suspension changes from "white" to "red", triggered by the stop pattern of the reel effect combining the two reels and becoming "change" in the same variation. After 2 variations, that is, with the symbol variation related to trigger suspension, “red” display is executed as the variation indication display mode due to the suspension display mode of trigger suspension being “red”. The display of "chance" is executed from the "red" display as the preview effect (the preview effect of the variation suggestion display mode causing an action).

  Next, in the lower stage, the reel effect is executed, and the player operates the sub input button with the same change thereafter, causing the player to "stop" the reel effect as a stop symbol, and "x" to the right reel. Stop. After that, with the same change, the display mode of the trigger suspension remains "white", triggered by the fact that the stop symbol of the reel effect is not "changed" by combining the two reels. In addition, since the pending change is not executed, the fluctuation advance presentation effect is not also executed.

  As described above, in FIG. 79, when the reel effect is executed, the reel is stopped by the player operating the sub input button, and two reels are put together as the effect result of the reel effect to “change”. Thus, the hold change is performed, and the hold announcement is configured to be performed by the hold change being performed. When the player does not operate the sub input button, the reel effect is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the reel effect (effect result is notified). In addition, until the fluctuation time elapses (ends), the sub input button can be operated any number of times, and each reel is stopped each time the operation is performed. That is, even if it fails once, you may comprise so that the challenge of a second time is possible. If the effect is successful, the sub input button can not be operated. In addition, it may be possible to arrange “change” and “conversion” multiple times, and it is possible to expect further change in reservation by re-arrangement even after change in one period. (It may be executed for the indication of the change indication).

(Pending look-ahead effect change example 17)
Next, FIG. 80 shows a change example 17 of the pre-hold presentation effect. First, the number of holds is 3, and the hold of the third digest order is a trigger hold. After that, with the same change, on the occasion of the occurrence of the trigger hold, the hold concealment effect (effect in which all the hold displays are in the concealed state) is executed. After 3 changes, triggered by the start of the symbol change related to the trigger hold, the hold concealment effect is ended, and "red" display is executed as the change suggestion display mode.

  Thus, in FIG. 80, it is configured to be able to execute the hold concealment effect in which all the hold displays are in the concealed state when the trigger hold occurs, and the hold concealment effect is executed, Although it becomes definite that the variation indication display mode is displayed in a display mode other than “white” which is the normal display mode, which display mode becomes (“blue” or “red”? ) Is configured to be concealed until symbol variation related to trigger hold is started. By configuring in this manner, the player changes the hold display of the trigger hold from “white” to “hold” during execution of the hold concealment effect, and the result is found in the variation suggestion display mode related to the trigger hold. Then I will think. In addition, when a hold concealment effect is performed, an action may be generated, and it may be configured so that it can not be determined which is the hold display mode of the hold changed by the action. In addition, it may be suggested or notified not by the action by the image but by the sound (for example, when the sound is "picon!", It is decided that the hold change is made and it can not be determined by the appearance of the image). . In addition, although the configuration may be applied to the fluctuation indication, when configured as such, concealment is made only until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation (a timing before the fluctuation stop timing). (It is preferable to display the fluctuation indication after a predetermined time has elapsed).

(Hold ahead reading effect change example 18)
Next, FIG. 81 shows a modification 18 of the pre-hold presentation effect. First, in the upper row, the number of reservations is 3, the third suspension order is reserved as a trigger suspension, and the suspension display mode of the trigger suspension is the “treasure box”. After one change, the symbol change is executed without a new hold occurring. After the second change, the symbol change related to trigger hold is executed without occurrence of a new hold, and the variation indication display mode of the symbol change related to trigger hold is displayed in the “treasure box”.

  Next, in the lower part, the number of reservations is 3, the third reservation order of suspension is a trigger suspension, and the suspension display mode of the trigger suspension is “treasure box”. After one change thereafter, a new hold occurs during the symbol change after the one change. After that, after the same change, in response to the occurrence of the new hold, the hold display mode of the trigger hold changes from “treasure box” to “red”. After 2 changes, the symbol change related to trigger suspension is executed, and the variation indication display mode of the symbol change related to trigger suspension is displayed in “red”.

  As described above, in FIG. 81, although the trigger display pending display mode becomes the "treasure box" when the trigger hold occurs, the "treasure box" suspension is a display mode for concealing the jackpot expectation degree, and the trigger At the hold occurrence time, the player can recognize that the trigger hold has occurred, but can not recognize the jackpot expectation degree of the symbol variation related to the trigger hold. In addition, the trigger display for which the hold display mode is “treasure box” changes the hold display mode for trigger hold from “treasure box” as a hold change effect is executed by the occurrence of a new hold after the trigger hold occurs. It is configured to

(Pending look-ahead effect change example 19)
Next, FIG. 82 shows a change 19 on hold prefetching effect. First, in the huge reserve prefetching effect in the upper row, the number of reserves is 3, and the third reserve order pending is the trigger reserve related to the huge reserve prefetching effect, the giant reserve turning effect Acquisition attachment information) is being executed. After that, with the same change, the second main gaming side will be suspended, but the execution of the giant suspension pre-reading effect (and the giant suspension turning effect) is maintained. After 3 changes, the symbol change related to trigger suspension is started, and the variation indication display mode becomes a huge suspension display mode.

  Next, in the reserve allocation pre-reading effect of the lower stage, the number of reservations is 3, the hold of the third digest order is the trigger reserve related to the reserve allocation pre-reading effect, the reserve allocation effect (displayed at the time of reserve allocation pre-reading effect Pending attachment information) is being executed. After that, with the same change, the second main gaming side will hold, and the second main gaming side will hold while the holding division pre-reading effect is being executed, so the execution of the hold sharing pre-reading effect will be canceled. After 3 changes, the symbol change related to the trigger suspension will be started, but since the execution of the reservation reserve pre-reading effect is stopped, the variation indication display mode is displayed in the “white” display.

  As described above, in FIG. 82, even if the second main game side is suspended while the giant hold prefetching effect is being executed, the giant hold prefetching effect is continuously executed, while the hold ratio prefetch effect is being executed. When a hold on the second main gaming side occurs, the execution of the hold assignment pre-reading effect is configured to be canceled. In addition, when the reserve of the 2nd main game side occurs, when the preread effect which can continue execution and the preread effect which cancels execution are provided, the execution stop timing (1) The timing at which the display mode changes to "white", the timing at which the execution of the suspension allocation effect is canceled) is when the suspension occurs on the second main game side or when the second main game symbol starts to change, (2) non-time reduction gaming state Table contents of the first main game side variation mode determination table and the second main game side variation mode determination table in the non-time shortening gaming state (variation time that can be selected, whether it depends on the number of reservations, etc.) Is different, (3) The variation mode of the trigger suspension related to the reserve allocation pre-reading effect does not exist in the variation mode decision table of the 2nd main game side, (4) the reserve allocation pre-reading effect is under execution, the said suspension Ri specific announcement attraction not run only during the execution of the prefetch effect is executed, it may be configured. Further, in FIG. 82, two prefetching effects of a huge reserve prefetching effect and a reserve share prefetching effect are illustrated as the prefetch effect, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and two prefetching of hold change effect and display of reserve incidental information The configuration may be applied to the effect, for example, when a hold on the second main game side occurs during the execution of the huge hold prefetching effect, the hold change associated with the execution of the huge hold prefetch effect (in this example, While the huge preparation reserve display mode is maintained, the display of the reserve incidental information accompanying the execution of the huge reserve pre-reading effect (in this example, the huge reserve turning effect) may be configured to be deleted, or the hold change effect The same configuration may be applied to the background change effect and the background change effect (when the second main game side hold occurs, the hold change is maintained while the background change is eliminated or the background change is Maintained That one, pending changes are erased).

(Pending look-ahead effect change example 20)
Next, FIG. 83 shows a modification 20 of the reserve prefetching presentation effect. First, in the top row, the number of reservations is 1 and the decorative symbol is fluctuating. After that, with the same change, trigger hold newly occurs. After 1 change, no new hold occurs and no hold change effect is executed.

  Next, in the second from the upper row, the number of reservations is 3 and the decorative symbol is fluctuating. After that, with the same change, trigger hold newly occurs. After 1 change, no new hold will occur. After 2 changes, the pending change presentation is not executed.

  Next, in the third from the upper row, the number of reservations is 3, and the decorative symbol is fluctuating. After that, with the same change, trigger hold newly occurs. After 1 change, no new hold has occurred. Thereafter, with the same change, a new hold occurs. After that, in the same change, as the first hold change effect in the change, an effect in which the “sheep” skips the blue hold display toward trigger hold is executed. After that, the hold display mode of the trigger hold on which the blue hold display collides changes from “white” to “blue” in the same variation. After that, at the same change, as the second hold change effect in the change, an effect is performed in which the “lion” skips the red hold display toward the trigger hold. After that, the hold display mode of the trigger hold on which the red hold display collides changes from “blue” to “red” in the same variation.

  As described above, in FIG. 83, as the execution condition of the on-hold change effect, the execution is performed only when the number of on-hold is a predetermined number (for example, three) or more and the on-hold to be digested after the on-hold trigger exists It is configured to be able to Further, as shown, when the pre-reading effect shown in the figure is performed, a plurality of holding changes can be performed. In addition, even when configured in this way, the variation indication display change effect (effect to change the variation indication display) can be executed even if the number of reservations at trigger suspension occurrence is less than a predetermined number It is also good. (1) When there is only a hold on the trigger hold at the trigger hold occurrence time, the hold change presentation for the trigger hold is not executed, (2) the hold occurs even if there is no hold that occurred after the trigger hold A change effect may be performed. (3) By the hold change effect, when the hold change effect is executed even if there is no hold that occurs after the trigger hold, and when there is no hold that occurs after the trigger hold. You may have the case where holding | placing change presentation is not performed.

(Other pending look-ahead effects)
The configuration of the reserve pre-reading effect that can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine in the present example will be described in detail below.

(Other pending look-ahead effects 1)
When a specific pre-reading effect is generated, the pending display may be erased and the pending change may not be performed during the pre-reading effect. In addition, when comprised in this way, the said fluctuation | variation suggestion display may be displayed and a display aspect may also be comprised so that a change is possible.

(Other pending look-ahead effects 2)
(1) After notifying the player of the hold display mode after the hold change, the presence or absence of the hold change is determined according to the success or failure of one hold change action (change to the hold display mode notified by the action success) ), (2) the presence or absence of a hold change is determined according to the success or failure of one hold change action without notifying the player of the hold display mode after the hold change, (3) the hold display after the hold change After notifying the player of a plurality of types of pending display modes as a candidate of the mode, the pending change is made to any of the plurality of types of pending display mode candidates (the pending change to any becomes definite when the action occurs May be configured as follows.

(Other pending look-ahead effects 3)
(1) A treasure box is displayed as the variation suggestion display aspect relating to a certain symbol variation, and the treasure box is opened during the certain symbol variation and an item appears (2) at the timing before the item appears The display may change (3) The timing before the super reach becomes (for example, from the start of the change) if the item does not appear until the timing to become the super reach (for example, 30 seconds after the start of the change) It may be configured such that the jackpot expectation of the symbol variation is higher than the case where the item appears at the 5 seconds elapsed timing).

(Other pending look-ahead effects 4)
(1) In the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, the reservation pre-reading effect is not executed, (2) the reservation pre-reading effect is executed even in the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening game state, but the probability fluctuation gaming state and time Even if it is configured such that the execution time of the hold pre-reading effect in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening game state is relatively shorter than the execution time of the hold pre-reading effect in the game states other than the short game state Good. In addition, the configuration is applied to symbol variation on the second main game side in the opening time extension function operation (time shortening gaming state), and the first in the opening time extension function non-operating (non-time shortening gaming state). It may be configured to be applied to symbol variations on the main game side.

(Other pending look-ahead effects 5)
As the pending display mode, there are a plurality of pending types (if the pending type is different, the shape etc. of the pending display mode is different), and there are a plurality of pending display modes in the same pending type (the pending form is identical or similar) But the display color is different etc.)

(Other pending look-ahead effects 6)
(1) When the variation suggestion display aspect is changing (for example, when it is a display aspect other than "white"), the holding change is not performed, (2) the variation suggestion display aspect is changing (E.g., when the display mode is other than "white") than when the variation indication mode is not changed (e.g., when the "white" display mode is used) It may be configured such that holding change is difficult to be executed, and by configuring as such, the player pays attention depending on whether or not the symbol variation will be a big hit. Moreover, when the said change suggestion display aspect is changing, although holding change may be performed, you may comprise so that several holding change may not be performed with respect to several holding.

(Other pending look-ahead effects 6)
It is determined to which stage the fluctuation indication for the certain hold changes according to the hold indication mode for the certain hold (for example, the change suggestive display mode for the “red” hold is It has become definite that it will become the said change suggestion indication mode of the big hit expectation of “red” or more.In addition, the change indication indication concerned regardless of the hold indication mode concerning the certain hold being “red” If the mode does not change to a display mode of "blue" or more, it is determined that the certain symbol variation is a big hit, and if the shape of the hold display mode is "treasure box" The variation indication display mode is a display mode with a big hit expectation degree of "green" or higher, and when the shape of the hold display mode is "safe", a display with the variation indication mode with a big hit expectation degree of "red" or higher It is definite that it becomes an aspect It may be so that configuration.

(Other pending look-ahead effects 7)
(1) The variation indication display mode (in this example, “rainbow color”) that is determined to be a big hit can be displayed, but the hold display mode that is determined to be a big hit is not displayed, ie , The indication that the jackpot becomes definite can be displayed only in the fluctuation indication, (2) the jackpot becomes definite, or the jackpot information with high expectation for the jackpot (incident related to the fluctuation indication The information can also be displayed as reserve incidental information) (cannot be displayed in the reserve incidental information pertaining to the pending indication), (3) it will be determined to be a big hit, or , Big hit expected retention incidental information (also incidental information related to the fluctuation indication is also taken as incidental attachment information) is read-ahead fluctuation (digested after trigger hold occurs, and digested before trigger hold) Not erased during symbol variation) performed according to the hold to be, it may be configured.

(Other pending look-ahead effects 8)
After making a specific holding change, it may be configured not to execute the holding change any more, for example, when the holding display mode in which a big hit such as "rainbow color" becomes definite, or "red" In the case of a pending display mode having a high hit probability such as, etc., no pending change is executed any more (a presentation relating to a further pending advance presentation effect is not executed). In addition, "Battle" suspension, which is a display mode that suggests execution of battle reach effect, and "pseudo" suspension (which may have incidental information), which is a display mode that suggests execution of pseudo continuous variation, are also more than this. Hold does not change, or incidental information does not change (not the appearance of new incidental information, the display mode of incidental information itself already attached does not change), and the display mode of the suspension with incidental information attached May be configured to change.

(Other pending look-ahead effects 9)
During the small hit game, it may be configured to be able to execute a holding pre-reading effect (hold change effect, background change effect, etc.) with respect to the hold occurring before the start of the small hit game. In addition, when configured as such, (1) transition to the limited frequency state after the small hitting game is over (when it is configured such that the transition to the limited frequency state is easily performed, the reach fluctuation It is possible for a pending change that suggests the execution of the game to be executed without doubt during the small hit game running, and it is possible to increase the execution probability of the pending change that suggests the execution of the reach change) The reserved prefetching effect to be executed during the small hit game may be configured to be executed other than during the small hit game.

(Other pending look-ahead effects 10)
In the fluctuation indication display mode, the jackpot expectation of the symbol fluctuation (the fluctuation) related to the fluctuation indication is indicated and / or the presentation content to be executed in the fluctuation, “type of the fluctuation indication display It may be configured such that “number> number of types of pending display mode”. In addition, when there are many types of the variation indication, the variation indication mode can be changed in many ways at the time of execution of the symbol variation which is a long variation time (a plurality of actions are executed, Ranked in multiple stages, etc.). In addition, it may be configured such that “the number of types of the variation indication display mode <the number of types of suspension display mode”, and when configured as such, it may be noticed by the suspension change up to the symbol variation related to the trigger suspension. This becomes possible (the variation suggestion display mode is an effect mainly based on reach effect and the like, so it is suitable when there is no problem even if the number of types is not large).

(Other pending look-ahead effects 11)
It has a prefetching zone (for example, background rendering is changing) which is executed over a plurality of changes in a situation where there is a trigger reserve, and in the case of the prefetching zone, it is not the prefetching zone. Also, the on-hold change effect may be configured to be easily performed. In addition, two pre-reading zones may be configured to have pre-reading zone A and pre-reading zone B, and in such a case, one in pre-reading zone A stay is suspended rather than being in pre-reading zone B stay. You may comprise so that change presentation may be easy to generate | occur | produce. Such a configuration is preferably applied to the configuration of the rotation hold described above, and when the rotation hold is displayed, if the user is staying in the pre-reading zone, it is better than when not staying. It can be configured that the hold change is easy to be performed (it is easy to change to the hold display mode of the big hit expectation of “blue” or more).

(Other pending look-ahead effects 12)
It may be configured to display the holding frame as described above, and the display of the holding frame may change (holding frame change) each time the holding change effect is executed. In addition, when configured as such, (1) no change in holding frame is performed during a specific effect such as during super reach, and (2) the change indication is not displayed when a change in holding frame is not performed However, when the holding frame change is executed, the fluctuation indication is displayed to be more noticeable to the player than the holding display. (3) The holding display that suggests execution of the holding change (for example, the above-described rotation display) It may be configured such that the change of holding frame is not executed when it changes to “display”. When (1) the initial display mode (for example, “white”) is shifted to the fluctuation indication (the fluctuation indication mode is also “white”), it is temporarily displayed as the fluctuation indication mode Although the display may be deleted immediately after the display, or the change indication display mode is not displayed, (2) the change indication is relative to the change indication when the display is changed to the change indication. The display mode may be changed to the end of the display for a long time (for example, until the end of the symbol change), and the display mode may change in the middle of the symbol change. (3) It may be configured such that the variation suggestion display mode changed from the display mode may be displayed (for example, from non-display to "blue" display).

(Other pending look-ahead effects 13)
There may be a hold in which an effect prompting the operation of the sub input button is executed when there is a probability variation gaming state and a time shortening gaming state, and for example, (1) a jackpot which is a low profit for the player It is easier for the player to hold the sub-input button than the hold, which makes a high profit for the player, and it is easier for the player to operate the sub-input button. It is difficult to be executed: (2) when an effect prompting the operation of the sub input button is executed, when an effect prompting the operation of the sub input button is not executed, and when the hold change is executed The background rendering to be performed may be configured to be different.

(Other pending look-ahead effects 14)
An effect display device and a sub effect display device (so-called sub liquid crystal) capable of displaying effects different from the effect display device, and a pending change effect executed on the sub effect display device There is a pending change effect that is executed in conjunction with the effect display of the effect display device.

(Other pending look-ahead effects 15)
By operating the sub input button within the effective period, the variation indication causes action (for example, "chance" indication) any number of times every operation, and the pattern related to the variation indication according to the type of the action. You may be comprised so that the big hit expectation of fluctuation may differ.

(Other pending look-ahead effects 16)
As the pending change effect that can be executed in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, the two suspension indications change adjacently (for example, the second digestion order suspension and the third digestion order suspension), It is relatively high profit for the player if it becomes a big hit in the symbol variation related to the reserve to be digested, it is relatively high for the player if it becomes a big hit in the symbol variation related to the reserve to be digested later May be configured to be less profitable. In addition, when it comprises in that way, the production | generation generation | occurrence | production timing of the said pre-reading production | presentation is the time of the occurrence of the reserve hold | maintained later. Also, as a pending change to be executed in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, there is a high probability of big hit such as a specific advance notice effect or a reach effect by symbol variation in a situation where a suspension of a particular suspension display mode remains If the effect occurs (I hit a big hit), the symbol variation concerned is high profit big hit {round number relatively large, shift to probability fluctuation gaming state after big hit end (shift to non probability changing gaming state after big hit end It may be determined that it is a gaming machine having a)), or the possibility of becoming a high profit jackpot is relatively high.

(Other pending look-ahead effects 17)
If group A and group B are included as a result of a predetermined effect (for example, roulette effect), and the effect is group A, it indicates the result of the outcome of the auxiliary game while the effect If it is B, a pending change is performed. In addition, when the rendition result is the group A, it may be configured to indicate the success or failure result of the symbol variation.

(Other pending look-ahead effects 18)
It may be configured to be able to notify in advance of the number of reserve incidental information, and for example, it is configured to suggest the number of reserve incidental information according to the variation indication display mode at a time before the suspension of the variation indication is digested. You may In addition, with regard to the number of displayed collateral information, there is a possibility that it will be reduced while a look-ahead fluctuation (pattern fluctuation relating to a suspension that is digested after trigger hold occurs and is digested before trigger hold) Is relatively low (it may be configured to be easily maintained or increased), and it may be configured to be relatively highly likely to decrease at the time of symbol fluctuation related to trigger hold. Moreover, when it comprises in this way, it is desirable to be comprised so that it may not change into a display mode with a low big hit expectation degree about a pending | holding display mode and the said fluctuation | variation suggestion display mode.

(Other pending look-ahead effects 19)
The rate at which the hold change effect is executed for a certain hold is that the symbol change relating to the certain hold is a reach change and the symbol change is a loss, and the certain hold concerned. In the case where the symbol variation does not execute the reach variation and the symbol variation is a loss, the symbol variation relating to a certain suspension which is the former performs a reach variation and the symbol variation is a loss The on-hold change presentation may be configured to be performed more easily if there is an event. Also, in such a configuration, if there is a hold that will execute the reach change to the hold that is digested prior to the certain hold, it is digested prior to the certain hold. It is more difficult for a hold change effect to be performed than when there is no hold that will cause a reach change to be held, or a hold change that will cause a reach change to be taken before any given hold. May be configured not to be performed when there is a.

(Other pending look-ahead effects 20)
Even when the hold change effect is executed for the trigger hold, the hold change effect contents relating to the trigger hold may be determined based on the contents of the effect at the time of the symbol change related to the trigger hold being determined. Well, if configured as such, it may be configured to execute the on-hold change presentation at the on-hold timing of the on-hold being stored prior to the on-hold trigger. In addition, it may be configured to be able to execute the pending change presentation a plurality of times for the trigger pending, if it is configured in such a way, the pending display mode with a high hit probability expectancy each time the pending change presentation is executed It is desirable to configure so as to change (big hit expectation degree ranks up), and specifically, the big hit expectation degree (big hit fluctuation and lost fluctuation total) corresponding to the pending display mode The ratio of the occurrence ratio of the big hit fluctuation to the appearance ratio) "blue" → 10%, "yellow" → 30%, "red" → 70%, and hold change production twice for trigger hold When executing, when “yellow” is displayed as the hold display mode after the first hold change presentation is performed, the hold display mode after the second hold change presentation is “red” (“blue”) "Yellow" is a big hit expectation Not selected because it does not increase).

(Other pending look-ahead effects 21)
In a gaming machine capable of executing a reserve look-ahead effect (hold change effect, etc.), if a hold that is a big hit (or a small hit) is digested at a timing before a certain hold is digested, or When the gaming state changes, the pre-reading information (command concerning pre-reading effect) related to the certain hold may be ignored. By configuring in this way, when notifying the change result or change mode in advance, when transitioning from the probability fluctuation gaming state to the non-probability fluctuation gaming state, or when transitioning from the time shortening gaming state to the non time shortening gaming state In addition, it is possible to prevent the notification of betraying the player's expectation that the fluctuation result and / or the fluctuation mode notified in advance is different from the actual fluctuation result and / or the fluctuation mode. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the trouble between the gaming shop and the player caused by the display which is betraying the expectation. In addition, the jackpot (or small) even if the jackpot (or small hit) which is a big hit (or a small hit) is digested at a timing before the certain pending is digested, or even if the gaming state changes. If the gaming state after the end does not change, or if the gaming state after the change may cause the prefetching effect to be executed based on the prefetch information related to the certain hold, the prefetch information related to the certain hold (The command related to the pre-reading effect) may be configured to be used without being ignored. In addition, as the transition of the gaming state, there is also the end of the probability fluctuation gaming state due to the passage of the fluctuation number after the big hit end, the end of the time shortening gaming state (opening time extension function), etc. It may be configured to identify in advance (before migration).

(Other pending look-ahead effects 22)
When a certain hold occurs, a lottery (whether a certain hold becomes a trigger hold) is executed one or more times whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect also at the timing after the certain hold occurs. You may be comprised so that pre-reading effect may be performed from the timing which won the said lottery. By configuring as such, when the pre-reading effect is executed, the player can not determine which holding is the trigger of the pre-reading effect, and it is possible to expect any change during the pre-reading effect. It produces the effect of having a sense.

(Other pending look-ahead effects 23)
It has at least a variation mode determination table A and a variation mode determination table B in which the same variation time is easier to be selected than the variation mode determination table A, and the prefetching effect is executed (in particular, the suspension is digested before trigger suspension At the time of determination of the variation mode according to (1), the variation mode determination table B may be referred to.

(Other pending look-ahead effects 24)
As a feature of the gaming machine which can execute a specific advance notice effect as a preread effect, it is executed only when (1) the number of holdings is a predetermined number or more and a specific random number range for lottery (2) Depending on whether a certain hold is the first main game hold or the second main game hold, the presence or absence of a specific advance notice effect or the execution probability differs (3) the main game at the trigger hold occurrence In the case where the symbol is in motion, a specific advance notice effect may be configured to be executed by symbol fluctuation after the symbol fluctuation in the variation.

(Other pending look-ahead effects 25)
Certain hold (for example, trigger hold) is most likely to shift to the probability fluctuation gaming state as a gaming state after the jackpot is the highest pending display mode or the jackpot expected degree (or transitions to the probability fluctuation gaming state) When it is displayed in the hold display mode (for example, the "rainbow color" hold display mode) that is determined to be performed, the hold change effect is not executed for the certain hold (the abnormality is held) Changes may not be performed).

(Other pending look-ahead effects 26)
It is an image display that can be displayed around the hold display area, and it is possible to display a plurality of types of incidental information that would suggest a big hit expectation of a symbol variation related to a trigger hold, and a trigger hold occurs. May be configured to be able to accumulate the incidental information by the symbol variation related to the suspension to be digested before the trigger suspension and the symbol fluctuation related to the trigger suspension. In addition, there are cases where one incidental information is accumulated and a plurality of occasions are accumulated as the number of incidental information accumulated in one symbol fluctuation, and the number of times of symbol fluctuation that the incidental information is accumulated It may be configured such that the total number of additional information to be stored can be larger than that. Specifically, when the fourth hold is a trigger hold, if the fraud information is accumulated as “no accumulation → one accumulation → no accumulation → two accumulation”, the incidental information is While the symbol variation accumulated is two, the total number of incidental information accumulated is three.

(Other pending look-ahead production 27)
When the hold change effect is executed for the trigger hold and the display mode of the trigger hold changes, the symbol variation related to the hold to be digested before the trigger hold becomes a big hit (or a small hit) May be configured to be able to maintain the display of the pending display mode after the change of trigger pending during and / or after the jackpot (or jackpot), for example, the jackpot (or jackpot) If the hit) is “16R's big hit”, the display of the hold display mode after the change of trigger hold is not maintained (usually with a hold display mode), and the symbol variation related to the trigger hold is “2R's big hit” Alternatively, it may be configured to maintain the display of the hold display mode after the change of the trigger hold during and / or after the big hit (or small hit) when the "small hit" occurs. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the expectation of the trigger hold from being impaired due to hits such as "2R big hit" and "small hit" that would be low for the player.

(Other pending look-ahead effects 28)
As a pre-reading lottery, the pre-selection lottery to perform pre-reading lottery at the time of holding occurrence (at the time of winning of the gaming ball to the starting opening) It may be configured to have a time pre-reading lottery, and when the trigger hold exists within the holding, neither the change start pre-reading lottery nor the winning pre-reading lottery is executed. Further, in the next fluctuation of the symbol fluctuation relating to the trigger suspension, while the fluctuation start time pre-reading lottery is not executed, the winning time pre-reading lottery may be configured to be executable. In addition, it may be configured to be able to execute the change start look-ahead lottery only for the hold that did not win the winning look-ahead draw. By configuring in this way, the pre-reading effect relating to a plurality of trigger suspension is continuously executed, and other pre-reading effect is not executed while the pre-reading effect is being executed, and the player is currently executed. An appropriate pre-reading effect can be executed, for example, because it is possible to prevent a situation in which the pre-reading effect is a pre-reading effect started from which symbol change. In addition, the execution timing of the pre-reading lottery is not limited to this, for example, the pre-drawing lottery (varying pre-selection lottery) at the timing in the middle of the symbol variation (for example, the timing 5 seconds after the symbol variation start). It may be configured to be executable. In addition, when it wins the aforementioned change halfway preview lottery, it is possible to constitute to stop the stop design of the decoration symbol before and after the aforementioned change lottery ahead lottery lottery selection, the effect contents under execution during the aforementioned fluctuation It may be configured to change between before and after the pre-selection lottery winning (rewriting in the middle of the change pre-selection lottery). In addition, when winning in the change look-ahead lottery, it not only rewrites the stop symbol (or the effect to be executed) concerning the symbol fluctuation currently in fluctuation, but also each of the symbol fluctuation concerning the trigger hold existing within the hold The stop symbol (or the effect to be executed) in the change may be also rewritten.

(Other pending look-ahead effects 29)
As a pre-reading effect, a pre-reading effect accompanied by a pre-change effect, and a specific symbol as a stop symbol of a decorative symbol ) May be provided as a specific symbol pre-reading effect that will be stopped and displayed continuously across multiple changes, and if configured as such, it may be performed only during the execution of the particular symbol pre-reading effect You may provide an effect (notice effect, background effect, etc.).

(Other pending look-ahead effects 30)
When the player operates the sub input button to execute button effect that suggests the big hit expectation in the symbol variation, and when preread effect is configured to be executed over a plurality of variations, the plurality of variations The execution frequency of the button effect in the final change may be higher than the execution frequency of the button effect in the changes other than the final change of the plurality of changes (the button effect may be easily performed).

(Other pending look-ahead effects 31)
In the gaming machine where the probability fluctuation gaming state can be ended by ending the symbol fluctuation a fixed number of times after the special game is over, the probability fluctuation gaming state and the predetermined period (pattern fluctuation predetermined number of times) after shifting to the probability fluctuation gaming state The pre-reading lottery or the pre-reading effect may not be executed in the specific period before the end (pattern fluctuation of the specific number of times). In addition, in the period from the predetermined number of times of fluctuation of the probability fluctuation gaming state to the final fluctuation of the probability fluctuation gaming state (symbol fluctuation to shift to the non probability fluctuation gaming state from the next symbol fluctuation) It may be configured as follows. In other words, no pre-reading effect is performed for the hold of the scheduled change to be the final fluctuation of the probability fluctuation gaming state, in other words, in the symbol fluctuation one fluctuation before the final fluctuation (the symbol fluctuation one rotation before the final fluctuation) Do not execute look-ahead effects on hold corresponding to fluctuations. For example, in the symbol change one change before the final change, the change of the hold image corresponding to the final change may not be executed (a predetermined period after transition to the probability change gaming state, or a big hit end) The same may apply to the retention that sometimes remains). In addition, the configuration (a configuration in which the pre-reading effect is not executed for the suspension of the final change, etc.) may be applied to the time reduction game state (during opening extension function operation). In addition, in the final change of the probability change gaming state (or time shortening gaming state), pre-reading effect (pre-reading lottery) against the reserve (especially the hold of the second main game side) of the digestion schedule after the final change It may be configured not to execute.

(Other pending look-ahead effects 32)
In the final change (the symbol change from the next symbol change to the non-time-shortened game state) in the time saving gaming state, the pre-reading lottery (or the pre-reading effect) may not be executed.

(Other pending look-ahead effects 33)
There is a specific hold display mode that can be displayed only when there is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more of the hold numbers as the hold display mode, and when the specific hold display mode is displayed, the sub-input is made When the effect for prompting the button operation is executed, and the sub input button is operated at the time of the effect execution, the specific hold display mode changes to a different hold display mode, or the specific hold display mode is configured to perform an action May be Further, the specific suspension display mode is configured to have a higher rate of suspension change at the time of suspension occurrence, as compared with other suspension display modes after suspension change (a suspension display mode other than “white”). In addition, such a configuration may be configured to be executed only when it is not in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state.

(Other pending look-ahead effects 34)
The occurrence of the trigger hold may be configured to change the hold indication and the variation indication, the display position of the hold frame, and / or the display size. Further, the display of the holding frame may be continued even if the symbol variation relating to the trigger suspension is being executed and the advance notice effect is being executed.

(Summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configurations shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concepts based on the additional configurations shown in the above embodiments are of course added to these concepts, as well as the combination and separation (superordinate conceptization) of these listed concepts. May be

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (1) is
A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10),
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g);
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A for acquiring a random number based on entering a ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied The random number temporary storage means (for example, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B) which temporarily stores the acquired random numbers and controls the holding to occur.
If the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, a yes / no judgment is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbols) for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after changing the identification information in the game symbol display portion A21g and the second main game symbol display portion B21g) Control means MP11-C),
Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing special games advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group;
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming part (for example, the secondary control board S) Equipped with MT)
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving the game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side,
Effect display content control means (e.g., for example, control effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (e.g., information transmission / reception control means SM40) , Effect display control means SM20),
An effect display unit (for example, effect display) is a fluctuation right image that is an image object that is newly displayed triggered by the occurrence of a new hold and shifted and displayed upon satisfaction of the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information It is possible to display on the device SG), and has a plurality of display modes as a display mode of the variable right image, and a type of display mode in the certain variable right image during a period when a certain variable right image is displayed Is configured to be changeable,
It is possible to display a fluctuation right image corresponding to the suspension not satisfying the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information, and correspond to the fluctuation display of the identification information performed when the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. It is configured to be able to display the variable right image,
During a period in which a certain variable right image is displayed, an accompanying image, which is an image attached to the certain variable right image, can be displayed,
During a period in which a certain fluctuation right image is displayed, it is configured to be able to execute cooperation effect which is an effect of making the certain fluctuation right image cooperate with a predetermined advance notice effect,
During a period in which a certain variable right image is displayed, the type of display mode in the certain variable right image is changed or an incidental to the certain variable right image, triggered by the execution of the cooperative effect. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being able to display an accompanying image.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (2) is
A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10),
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g);
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A for acquiring a random number based on entering a ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied The random number temporary storage means (for example, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B) which temporarily stores the acquired random numbers and controls the holding to occur.
If the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, a yes / no judgment is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbols) for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after changing the identification information in the game symbol display portion A21g and the second main game symbol display portion B21g) Control means MP11-C),
Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing special games advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group;
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming part (for example, the secondary control board S) Equipped with MT)
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving the game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side,
Effect display content control means (e.g., for example, control effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (e.g., information transmission / reception control means SM40) , Effect display control means SM20),
An effect display unit (for example, effect display) is a fluctuation right image that is an image object that is newly displayed triggered by the occurrence of a new hold and shifted and displayed upon satisfaction of the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information It is possible to display on the device SG), and has a plurality of display modes as a display mode of the variable right image, and a type of display mode in the certain variable right image during a period when a certain variable right image is displayed Is configured to be changeable,
When changing the type of display mode in a certain change right image, the display change effect which is an effect of suggesting or notifying that the kind of display mode in the certain change right image is to be changed is executed, The type of display mode in the variable right image can be changed.
The variable display time of the identification information when the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied is variable according to the number of remaining hold when the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding the certain hold is satisfied. Configured to
It has a plurality of types of display modes as the display mode of the display change effect, and when the display change effect is executed during the fluctuation display of the identification information, according to the remaining time until the fluctuation display time of the identification information expires. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that display modes of the display change effect are different.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (3) is
A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10),
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g);
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A for acquiring a random number based on entering a ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied The random number temporary storage means (for example, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B) which temporarily stores the acquired random numbers and controls the holding to occur.
If the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, a yes / no judgment is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbols) for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after changing the identification information in the game symbol display portion A21g and the second main game symbol display portion B21g) Control means MP11-C),
Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing special games advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group;
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming part (for example, the secondary control board S) Equipped with MT)
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving the game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side,
Effect display content control means (e.g., for example, control effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (e.g., information transmission / reception control means SM40) , Effect display control means SM20),
An effect display unit (for example, effect display) is a fluctuation right image that is an image object that is newly displayed triggered by the occurrence of a new hold and shifted and displayed upon satisfaction of the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information It is possible to display on the device SG), and has a plurality of display modes as a display mode of the variable right image, and a type of display mode in the certain variable right image during a period when a certain variable right image is displayed Is configured to be changeable,
It is possible to display a fluctuation right image corresponding to the suspension not satisfying the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information, and correspond to the fluctuation display of the identification information performed when the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. It is configured to be able to display the variable right image,
At least a first display type and a second display type which is a type different from the first display type as the display mode type of the variable right image,
The first display type has a plurality of display modes of the variable right image,
The display mode belonging to the first display type is configured to be able to change the type of display mode when the variable right image is shift-displayed,
The display mode belonging to the second display type is configured such that the type of display mode can not be changed when the variable right image is shifted and displayed, or the type of display mode is more difficult to change than the first display type Yes,
When a certain change right image corresponding to a certain hold that does not satisfy the variable display start condition of the identification information is displayed in the display mode belonging to the first display type, the certain hold is identified thereafter When the variable display start condition of information is satisfied, the variable right image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information related to the certain hold is configured to be displayed in the display mode belonging to the first display type,
If a certain change right image corresponding to a certain hold that does not satisfy the variable display start condition of the identification information is displayed in the display mode belonging to the second display type, then the certain hold is identified. When the variable display start condition of the information is satisfied, the variable right image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information related to the certain hold is configured to be displayed in the display mode belonging to the first display type. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (4) is
A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10),
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g);
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A for acquiring a random number based on entering a ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied The random number temporary storage means (for example, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B) which temporarily stores the acquired random numbers and controls the holding to occur.
If the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, a yes / no judgment is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbols) for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after changing the identification information in the game symbol display portion A21g and the second main game symbol display portion B21g) Control means MP11-C),
Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing special games advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group;
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming part (for example, the secondary control board S) Equipped with MT)
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving the game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side,
Effect display content control means (e.g., for example, control effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (e.g., information transmission / reception control means SM40) , Effect display control means SM20),
An effect display unit (for example, effect display) is a fluctuation right image that is an image object that is newly displayed triggered by the occurrence of a new hold and shifted and displayed upon satisfaction of the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information It is possible to display on the device SG), and has a plurality of display modes as a display mode of the variable right image, and a type of display mode in the certain variable right image during a period when a certain variable right image is displayed Is configured to be changeable,
It is possible to display a fluctuation right image corresponding to the suspension not satisfying the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information, and correspond to the fluctuation display of the identification information performed when the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. It is configured to be able to display the variable right image,
It is configured to be able to suggest or notify the execution expectation degree of the special game by the display mode in the fluctuation right image corresponding to the fluctuation display of the identification information performed when the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied,
A plurality of types of display modes in the fluctuation right image corresponding to the fluctuation display of the identification information performed when the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied,
Depending on the type of display mode in the fluctuation right image corresponding to the fluctuation display of the identification information performed when the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, the execution expectation of the special game may be different,
The type of display mode in the fluctuation right image corresponding to the fluctuation display of the identification information performed when the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied is configured to be changed during the fluctuation display.
The type of display mode in the fluctuation right image corresponding to the fluctuation display of the identification information performed when the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied has a plurality of types of timing that can be changed during the fluctuation display.
The first timing, the first timing as the timing at which the type of display mode in the fluctuation right image corresponding to the fluctuation display of the identification information performed when the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied is changed during the fluctuation display. And at least a second timing that is closer to the timing at which the variable display ends than the timing,
When the type of display mode in the fluctuation right image corresponding to the fluctuation display of the identification information performed when satisfying the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information is changed during the fluctuation display, the change is made at the first timing The pachinko game is characterized in that it is configured to be more easily changed to a display mode that indicates that the degree of expectation for the execution of the special game is relatively higher when the second timing is changed than when being played. Machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (5) is
A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10),
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g);
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A for acquiring a random number based on entering a ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied The random number temporary storage means (for example, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B) which temporarily stores the acquired random numbers and controls the holding to occur.
If the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, a yes / no judgment is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbols) for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after changing the identification information in the game symbol display portion A21g and the second main game symbol display portion B21g) Control means MP11-C),
Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing special games advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group;
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming part (for example, the secondary control board S) Equipped with MT)
Normal gaming state and specific gaming state where it is easy to enter the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10) than the normal gaming state, and after the end of the special game execution Is configured to be in a specific gaming state,
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving the game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side,
Effect display content control means (e.g., for example, control effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (e.g., information transmission / reception control means SM40) , Effect display control means SM20),
An effect display unit (for example, effect display) is a fluctuation right image that is an image object that is newly displayed triggered by the occurrence of a new hold and shifted and displayed upon satisfaction of the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information It is possible to display on the device SG), and has a plurality of display modes as a display mode of the variable right image, and a type of display mode in the certain variable right image during a period when a certain variable right image is displayed Is configured to be changeable,
It is possible to display a fluctuation right image corresponding to the suspension not satisfying the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information, and correspond to the fluctuation display of the identification information performed when the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. It is configured to be able to display the variable right image,
In the normal gaming state, the variable right image can be displayed corresponding to the variable display of the identification information performed when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied,
In the specific gaming state, the variable right image is not displayed corresponding to the variable display of the identification information performed when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, or in the specific gaming state In some cases, the probability of not displaying the fluctuation right image corresponding to the fluctuation display of the identification information performed when the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied is higher than in the case of the normal gaming state Yes,
The display mode belonging to the specific group among the plurality of types of display modes in the variable right image is a display mode for predicting that the type of display mode in the variable right image is changed during the period in which the variable right image is displayed. Yes,
In the case where a certain change right image corresponding to a certain hold that does not satisfy the variable display start condition of the identification information is displayed in the display mode belonging to the specific group, the certain hold is thereafter made of the identification information When the variable display image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information related to a certain hold is displayed in the display mode belonging to the specific group when the variable display start condition is satisfied, the change related to the certain hold The type of display mode in the variable right image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information is changed to a display mode indicating the execution expectation of the special game when the variable display of the identification information related to the certain suspension is stopped and displayed. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (6) is
A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10),
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g);
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A for acquiring a random number based on entering a ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied The random number temporary storage means (for example, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B) which temporarily stores the acquired random numbers and controls the holding to occur.
If the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, a yes / no judgment is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbols) for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after changing the identification information in the game symbol display portion A21g and the second main game symbol display portion B21g) Control means MP11-C),
Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing special games advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group;
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming part (for example, the secondary control board S) Equipped with MT)
Normal gaming state and specific gaming state where it is easy to enter the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10) than the normal gaming state, and after the end of the special game execution Is configured to be in a specific gaming state,
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving the game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side,
Effect display content control means (e.g., for example, control effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (e.g., information transmission / reception control means SM40) , Effect display control means SM20),
An effect display unit (for example, effect display) is a fluctuation right image that is an image object that is newly displayed triggered by the occurrence of a new hold and shifted and displayed upon satisfaction of the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information It is possible to display on the device SG), and has a plurality of display modes as a display mode of the variable right image, and a type of display mode in the certain variable right image during a period when a certain variable right image is displayed Is configured to be changeable,
When changing the type of display mode in a certain change right image, the display change effect which is an effect of suggesting or notifying that the kind of display mode in the certain change right image is to be changed is executed, The type of display mode in the variable right image can be changed.
When in the normal gaming state, while performing the display change effect when changing the type of display mode in the variable right image, while in the specific gaming state, change the type of display mode in the variable right image When changing the type of display mode in the variable right image, it is configured not to execute the display change effect at the time of playing, or in the specific gaming state than in the normal gaming state. Are configured to have a high probability of not
At least the effect display mode B different from the effect display mode A and the effect display mode A as display modes of the display change effect,
The display change effect is executed in the effect display mode B than when the display change effect is executed in the effect display mode A and the type of the display mode in the fluctuation right image is changed in the normal game state. If the type of display mode in the variable right image is changed, it is configured to be easily changed to a display mode that indicates that the degree of expectation for execution of the special game is relatively high.
Even when the type of display mode in the variable right image is not changed, the display change effect can be executed, and after the display change effect is executed in the normal gaming state, the type of display mode in a certain variable right image is Even if it has not been changed, it is characterized in that the special game can be executed in response to satisfying the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the hold corresponding to the certain variable right image. It is a pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (7) is
A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10),
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g);
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A for acquiring a random number based on entering a ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied The random number temporary storage means (for example, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B) which temporarily stores the acquired random numbers and controls the holding to occur.
If the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, a yes / no judgment is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbols) for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after changing the identification information in the game symbol display portion A21g and the second main game symbol display portion B21g) Control means MP11-C),
Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing special games advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group;
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming part (for example, the secondary control board S) Equipped with MT)
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving the game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side,
Effect display content control means (e.g., for example, control effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (e.g., information transmission / reception control means SM40) , Effect display control means SM20),
An effect display unit (for example, effect display) is a fluctuation right image that is an image object that is newly displayed triggered by the occurrence of a new hold and shifted and displayed upon satisfaction of the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information It is possible to display on the device SG), and has a plurality of display modes as a display mode of the variable right image, and a type of display mode in the certain variable right image during a period when a certain variable right image is displayed Is configured to be changeable,
It is possible to display a fluctuation right image corresponding to the suspension not satisfying the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information, and correspond to the fluctuation display of the identification information performed when the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. It is configured to be able to display the variable right image,
The display mode of the specific type among the plurality of display modes in the variable right image is a display mode for giving notice that it is definite that a special game will be executed in the future,
When the variable right image corresponding to the suspension not satisfying the variable display start condition of the identification information is displayed in the display mode of the specific type, the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. When a variable right image corresponding to a variable display of identification information to be performed is displayed, the pachinko game machine is configured to be displayed in the display mode of the specific type.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (8) is
A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10),
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g);
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A for acquiring a random number based on entering a ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied The random number temporary storage means (for example, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B) which temporarily stores the acquired random numbers and controls the holding to occur.
If the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, a yes / no judgment is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbols) for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after changing the identification information in the game symbol display portion A21g and the second main game symbol display portion B21g) Control means MP11-C),
Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing special games advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group;
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming part (for example, the secondary control board S) Equipped with MT)
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving the game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side,
Effect display content control means (e.g., for example, control effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (e.g., information transmission / reception control means SM40) , Effect display control means SM20),
An effect display unit (for example, effect display) is a fluctuation right image that is an image object that is newly displayed triggered by the occurrence of a new hold and shifted and displayed upon satisfaction of the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information It is possible to display on the device SG), and has a plurality of display modes as a display mode of the variable right image, and a type of display mode in the certain variable right image during a period when a certain variable right image is displayed Is configured to be changeable,
It is possible to display a fluctuation right image corresponding to the suspension not satisfying the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information, and correspond to the fluctuation display of the identification information performed when the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. It is configured to be able to display the variable right image,
During a period in which a certain variable right image is displayed, an accompanying image, which is an image attached to the certain variable right image, can be displayed,
A display having a plurality of types of display modes as a type of incidental image, and a display mode of a specific type of the plurality of types of display modes foretelling that it is substantially deterministic that a special game will be executed in the future It is an aspect,
When displaying the fluctuation right image corresponding to the suspension not satisfying the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information, the incidental image is not attached in the display mode of the specific type, while the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information is The pachinko game is characterized in that when displaying the fluctuation right image corresponding to the fluctuation display of the identification information performed when the content is satisfied, the incidental image can be attached in the display mode of the specific type. Machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (9) is
A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10),
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g);
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A for acquiring a random number based on entering a ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied The random number temporary storage means (for example, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B) which temporarily stores the acquired random numbers and controls the holding to occur.
If the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, a yes / no judgment is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbols) for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after changing the identification information in the game symbol display portion A21g and the second main game symbol display portion B21g) Control means MP11-C),
Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing special games advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group;
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming part (for example, the secondary control board S) Equipped with MT)
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving the game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side,
Effect display content control means (e.g., for example, control effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (e.g., information transmission / reception control means SM40) , Effect display control means SM20),
An effect display unit (for example, effect display) is a fluctuation right image that is an image object that is newly displayed triggered by the occurrence of a new hold and shifted and displayed upon satisfaction of the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information It is possible to display on the device SG), and has a plurality of display modes as a display mode of the variable right image, and a type of display mode in the certain variable right image during a period when a certain variable right image is displayed Is configured to be changeable,
When changing the type of display mode in a certain change right image, the display change effect which is an effect of suggesting or notifying that the kind of display mode in the certain change right image is to be changed is executed, The type of display mode in the variable right image can be changed.
When the display change effect is executed within the fluctuation display time of a certain identification information, the type of display mode in the fluctuation right image corresponding to the hold can be changed for the remaining hold within the fluctuation display time It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (10) is
A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10),
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g);
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A for acquiring a random number based on entering a ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied The random number temporary storage means (for example, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B) which temporarily stores the acquired random numbers and controls the holding to occur.
If the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, a yes / no judgment is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbols) for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after changing the identification information in the game symbol display portion A21g and the second main game symbol display portion B21g) Control means MP11-C),
Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing special games advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group;
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming part (for example, the secondary control board S) Equipped with MT)
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving the game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side,
Effect display content control means (e.g., for example, control effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (e.g., information transmission / reception control means SM40) , Effect display control means SM20),
An effect display unit (for example, effect display) is a fluctuation right image that is an image object that is newly displayed triggered by the occurrence of a new hold and shifted and displayed upon satisfaction of the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information It is possible to display on the device SG), and has a plurality of display modes as a display mode of the variable right image, and a type of display mode in the certain variable right image during a period when a certain variable right image is displayed Is configured to be changeable,
As the plurality of types of display modes in the variable right image, at least a display mode A and a display mode B which is a display mode different from the display mode A,
The expectation of the special game execution expectation for the hold corresponding to the change right image displayed on the display mode B rather than the execution expectation for the special game for the hold corresponding to the change right image displayed on the display mode A Is configured to be high,
As a notice effect displayed in the variable display of identification information, at least a notice effect A and a notice effect B which is a notice effect different from the notice effect A,
The execution expectation of the special game according to the variable display in which the preview effect B is executed is configured to be relatively higher than the execution expectation of the special game according to the variable display in which the advance effect A is executed. ,
The display mode A is displayed as the display mode of the variable right image corresponding to the reserve of the next digesting schedule, the reserve is digested, and the variation display of the identification information when the variation display start condition of the identification information regarding the reserve is satisfied The display mode B is displayed as a display mode of the variable right image corresponding to the reserve of the next scheduled digesting than the expectation degree of the special game when the preliminary announcement effect A is displayed in the middle, and the reserve is digested. And while the advance notice A is displayed during the fluctuation display of the identification information when the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information regarding the hold is satisfied, while the execution expectation of the special game is higher,
The display mode A is displayed as the display mode of the variable right image corresponding to the reserve of the next digesting schedule, the reserve is digested, and the variation display of the identification information when the variation display start condition of the identification information related to the reserve is satisfied The display expectation A of the special game execution expectation in the case where the notice effect B is displayed during the display is displayed as the display mode of the variable right image corresponding to the suspension of the next scheduled digestion, and the suspension is It is configured to be higher than the expectation of the special game when the advance notice effect B is displayed during the fluctuation display of the identification information when the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information regarding the suspension is satisfied. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (11) is
A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10),
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g);
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A for acquiring a random number based on entering a ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied The random number temporary storage means (for example, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B) which temporarily stores the acquired random numbers and controls the holding to occur.
If the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, a yes / no judgment is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbols) for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after changing the identification information in the game symbol display portion A21g and the second main game symbol display portion B21g) Control means MP11-C),
Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing special games advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group;
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming part (for example, the secondary control board S) Equipped with MT)
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving the game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side,
Effect display content control means (e.g., for example, control effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (e.g., information transmission / reception control means SM40) , Effect display control means SM20),
An effect display unit (for example, effect display) is a fluctuation right image that is an image object that is newly displayed triggered by the occurrence of a new hold and shifted and displayed upon satisfaction of the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information It is possible to display on the device SG), and has a plurality of display modes as a display mode of the variable right image, and a type of display mode in the certain variable right image during a period when a certain variable right image is displayed Is configured to be changeable,
In the case where there is a pre-hold that will satisfy the variable display start condition of the identification information prior to a certain hold and the certain hold, the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the pre-held reserve is satisfied During the variable display of the identification information at the time of, it is possible to execute the pre-hold presentation effect for giving a notice of the expectation for the future special game execution due to the remaining hold during the variable display of the identification information,
In the variation display of the identification information when the expectation of whether or not the type of display mode in the variation right image corresponding to the certain suspension is changed, satisfies the variation display start condition of the identification information related to the pre-submission suspension The pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention is configured to be different depending on the execution presence / absence of the holding pre-reading effect and / or the execution content of the pre-holding effect.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (12) is
A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10),
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g);
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A for acquiring a random number based on entering a ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied The random number temporary storage means (for example, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B) which temporarily stores the acquired random numbers and controls the holding to occur.
If the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, a yes / no judgment is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbols) for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after changing the identification information in the game symbol display portion A21g and the second main game symbol display portion B21g) Control means MP11-C),
Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing special games advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group;
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming part (for example, the secondary control board S) Equipped with MT)
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving the game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side,
Effect display content control means (e.g., for example, control effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (e.g., information transmission / reception control means SM40) , Effect display control means SM20),
An effect display unit (for example, effect display) is a fluctuation right image that is an image object that is newly displayed triggered by the occurrence of a new hold and shifted and displayed upon satisfaction of the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information It is possible to display on the device SG), and has a plurality of display modes as a display mode of the variable right image, and a type of display mode in the certain variable right image during a period when a certain variable right image is displayed Is configured to be changeable,
It is possible to display a fluctuation right image corresponding to the suspension not satisfying the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information, and correspond to the fluctuation display of the identification information performed when the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. It is configured to be able to display the variable right image,
When the display mode in the fluctuation right image corresponding to the fluctuation display of the identification information performed when the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, the fluctuation display of the identification information is started during the fluctuation display. It is configured not to change the type of display mode in the variable right image corresponding to the suspension not satisfying the conditions, or corresponds to the variable display of identification information performed when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied The display mode in the fluctuation right image corresponding to the fluctuation display of the identification information performed when the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied when the display manner in the fluctuation right image is the specific display manner is the specific display manner It is more difficult to change the type of display mode in the variable right image corresponding to the hold that does not satisfy the variable display start condition of the identification information than in the case of not being Being configured,
The number of types of display modes in the fluctuation right image corresponding to the fluctuation display of the identification information performed when the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied corresponds to the suspension corresponding to the suspension not satisfying the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be larger than the number of types of display modes in the right image.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (13) is
A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10),
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g);
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A for acquiring a random number based on entering a ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied The random number temporary storage means (for example, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B) which temporarily stores the acquired random numbers and controls the holding to occur.
If the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, a yes / no judgment is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbols) for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after changing the identification information in the game symbol display portion A21g and the second main game symbol display portion B21g) Control means MP11-C),
Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing special games advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group;
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming part (for example, the secondary control board S) Equipped with MT)
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving the game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side,
Effect display content control means (e.g., for example, control effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (e.g., information transmission / reception control means SM40) , Effect display control means SM20),
An effect display unit (for example, effect display) is a fluctuation right image that is an image object that is newly displayed triggered by the occurrence of a new hold and shifted and displayed upon satisfaction of the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information It is possible to display on the device SG), and has a plurality of display modes as a display mode of the variable right image, and a type of display mode in the certain variable right image during a period when a certain variable right image is displayed Is configured to be changeable,
It is possible to change the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) according to the operation mode with the operation member (for example, the sub input button SB) operable by the player.
The operation member (for example, as an operation mode with the sub input button SB, at least a first operation mode and a second operation mode different from the first operation mode,
When the operation member (for example, the operation mode with the sub input button SB is performed in the first operation mode during a period in which a certain change right image is displayed, a display manner in the certain change right image) Are configured to be able to change the type of
When the operation member (for example, the operation mode with the sub input button SB is performed in the second operation mode during a period in which a certain variable right image is displayed, the display manner in the certain variable right image) Are configured to be able to change the type of
Execution expectation of a special game suggested in the display mode after change when the type of display mode in the variable right image is changed by the first operation mode, and type of display mode in the variable right image according to the second operation mode The pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention is configured to be different from the expectation of the execution of the special game suggested in the display mode after the change when the game player is changed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (14) is
A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10),
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g);
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A for acquiring a random number based on entering a ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied The random number temporary storage means (for example, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B) which temporarily stores the acquired random numbers and controls the holding to occur.
If the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, a yes / no judgment is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbols) for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after changing the identification information in the game symbol display portion A21g and the second main game symbol display portion B21g) Control means MP11-C),
Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing special games advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group;
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming part (for example, the secondary control board S) Equipped with MT)
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving the game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side,
Effect display content control means (e.g., for example, control effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (e.g., information transmission / reception control means SM40) , Effect display control means SM20),
An effect display unit (for example, effect display) is a fluctuation right image that is an image object that is newly displayed triggered by the occurrence of a new hold and shifted and displayed upon satisfaction of the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information It is possible to display on the device SG), and has a plurality of display modes as a display mode of the variable right image, and a type of display mode in the certain variable right image during a period when a certain variable right image is displayed Is configured to be changeable,
It is possible to display a fluctuation right image corresponding to the suspension not satisfying the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information, and correspond to the fluctuation display of the identification information performed when the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. It is configured to be able to display the variable right image,
During a period in which a certain variable right image is displayed, an accompanying image, which is an image attached to the certain variable right image, can be displayed,
The first display type and the first display type are different types as the types of incidental images attached by the fluctuation right image corresponding to the fluctuation display of the identification information performed when the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Have at least one second display type,
There are a plurality of display modes of the incidental image to be the second display type,
The accompanying image is displayed, which indicates the execution expectation degree of the special game based on the fluctuation display of the identification information corresponding to the incidental image, or is executed during the fluctuation display of the identification information corresponding to the incidental image It is configured to suggest the contents of the presentation,
The variation of the identification information corresponding to the incidental image when the incidental image is displayed in the display mode as the second display type than in the case where the incidental image is displayed in the display mode as the first display type It is configured so that the player can easily recognize the effect of the special game based on the display and the effect content to be executed during the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the incidental image,
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the display mode of the incidental image during the variable display of the identification information is changeable from the display mode of the first display type to the display mode of the second display type.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (15) is
A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10),
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g);
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A for acquiring a random number based on entering a ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied The random number temporary storage means (for example, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B) which temporarily stores the acquired random numbers and controls the holding to occur.
If the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, a yes / no judgment is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbols) for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after changing the identification information in the game symbol display portion A21g and the second main game symbol display portion B21g) Control means MP11-C),
Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing special games advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group;
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming part (for example, the secondary control board S) Equipped with MT)
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving the game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side,
Effect display content control means (e.g., for example, control effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (e.g., information transmission / reception control means SM40) , Effect display control means SM20),
An effect display unit (for example, effect display) is a fluctuation right image that is an image object that is newly displayed triggered by the occurrence of a new hold and shifted and displayed upon satisfaction of the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information It is possible to display on the device SG), and has a plurality of display modes as a display mode of the variable right image, and a type of display mode in the certain variable right image during a period when a certain variable right image is displayed Is configured to be changeable,
When changing the type of display mode in a certain change right image, the display change effect which is an effect of suggesting or notifying that the kind of display mode in the certain change right image is to be changed is executed, Are configured to change the type of display mode in the variable right image,
As an execution condition of the display change effect corresponding to a certain change right image, when the number of reservations at the time when the certain change right image is newly displayed is equal to or more than a predetermined number, it corresponds to the certain change right image A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to execute display change effects.
In addition, the pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (15) is
A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10),
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g);
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A for acquiring a random number based on entering a ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied The random number temporary storage means (for example, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B) which temporarily stores the acquired random numbers and controls the holding to occur.
If the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, a yes / no judgment is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbols) for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after changing the identification information in the game symbol display portion A21g and the second main game symbol display portion B21g) Control means MP11-C),
Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing special games advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group;
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming part (for example, the secondary control board S) Equipped with MT)
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving the game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side,
Effect display content control means (e.g., for example, control effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (e.g., information transmission / reception control means SM40) , Effect display control means SM20),
An effect display unit (for example, effect display) is a fluctuation right image that is an image object that is newly displayed triggered by the occurrence of a new hold and shifted and displayed upon satisfaction of the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information It is possible to display on the device SG), and has a plurality of display modes as a display mode of the variable right image, and a type of display mode in the certain variable right image during a period when a certain variable right image is displayed Is configured to be changeable,
It is possible to display a fluctuation right image corresponding to the suspension not satisfying the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information, and correspond to the fluctuation display of the identification information performed when the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. It is configured to be able to display the variable right image,
When changing the type of display mode in a certain change right image, the display change effect which is an effect of suggesting or notifying that the kind of display mode in the certain change right image is to be changed is executed, Are configured to change the type of display mode in the variable right image,
As an execution condition of the display change effect corresponding to a certain change right image, when the number of reservations at the time when the certain change right image is newly displayed is equal to or more than a predetermined number, it corresponds to the certain change right image It is configured to be able to execute a display change presentation,
The display change effect corresponding to the fluctuation right image corresponding to the fluctuation display of the certain identification information performed when the fluctuation display start condition of the certain identification information is satisfied in the fluctuation display period of the certain identification information The pachinko game machine may be configured to be executable.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (16) is
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
A variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking a closed state and an open state;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on entering the first start hole (for example, first main game start hole A10) ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A), the acquired first until the fluctuation display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, first main game symbol holding means MJ 32-A) which temporarily stores random numbers and controls so that the first hold occurs;
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to a first hold is satisfied, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main information display unit) according to the determination content based on the first random number related to the certain first hold The first identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11) which controls the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed in the game symbol display portion A21g). C C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second start hole (for example, second main game start hole B10) ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ 21-B), the acquired second random number is satisfied until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. A second random number temporary storage means (for example, a second main game symbol holding means MJ 32-B) which temporarily stores a random number and controls so that a second hold occurs;
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information related to a certain second hold is satisfied, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main information display unit) according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second The second identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11) which controls the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed in the game symbol display portion B21g). C C),
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) is advantageous for the player Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can be set
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming part (for example, the secondary control board S) MT) and has a specific gaming state in which it is easy to enter the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) than the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state, and after the execution of the special game ends Is configured to be in a specific gaming state,
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving the game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side,
Effect display content control means (e.g., for example, control effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (e.g., information transmission / reception control means SM40) , Effect display control means SM20),
An effect display of a fluctuation right image, which is an image object that is newly displayed upon occurrence of a new first hold or a second hold and is shifted and displayed upon satisfaction of a variable display start condition of identification information And a plurality of display modes including at least a normal display mode and a special display mode different from the normal display mode as a display mode of the variable right image, and a certain variable right image is displayed During the period, the type of display mode in the certain variable right image is configured to be changeable,
In a situation where the display mode in a certain variable right image is the special display mode, the first identification information or the second identification information is displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group among the predetermined groups, and the special game is executed. If the special game is over, the certain variable right image after the special game is over is configured to be a special display mode,
In a situation where the display mode in a certain variable right image is a special display mode, the first identification information or the second identification information is displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a group other than the specific group among the predetermined groups, When a game is executed, the certain variation right image after the end of the special game is configured to be in a normal display mode.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (17) is
A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10),
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g);
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A for acquiring a random number based on entering a ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied The random number temporary storage means (for example, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B) which temporarily stores the acquired random numbers and controls the holding to occur.
If the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, a yes / no judgment is executed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbols) for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after changing the identification information in the game symbol display portion A21g and the second main game symbol display portion B21g) Control means MP11-C),
Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing special games advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group;
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming part (for example, the secondary control board S) Equipped with MT)
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving the game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side,
Effect display content control means (e.g., for example, control effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (e.g., information transmission / reception control means SM40) , Effect display control means SM20),
In the case where there is a pre-hold, which is a hold that will satisfy the variable display start condition of the identification information prior to the certain hold and the certain hold, the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the pre-held reserve During the variable display of the identification information when satisfying the above, it is possible to execute a pre-pending presentation effect for giving an advance notice of the expectation for the future special game due to the given pending,
As for the reserve pre-reading effect, the pre-selection effect A and the pre-reading effect A are different pre-display effects B for different execution modes of the effects, and the pre-pred effects A and for pre-pending effects B And at least
The pending look-ahead effect A and the pending look-ahead effect B are configured not to be performed at the same time,
It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to be simultaneously executed with the reservation pre-reading effect B and the reservation pre-reading effect C.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (18) is
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on entering the first start hole (for example, first main game start hole A10) ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A), the acquired first until the fluctuation display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, first main game symbol holding means MJ 32-A) which temporarily stores random numbers and controls so that the first hold occurs;
In the case where the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to a certain first hold is satisfied, a yes / no judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the first First identification information display control means (for example, the first identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) 1 · second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second start hole (for example, second main game start hole B10) ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ 21-B), the acquired second random number is satisfied until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. A second random number temporary storage means (for example, a second main game symbol holding means MJ 32-B) which temporarily stores a random number and controls so that a second hold occurs;
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a yes / no decision is performed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the second based on the result of the yes / no decision Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) which controls the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display unit )When,
Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing special games advantageous to the player after the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group When,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming part (for example, the secondary control board S) Equipped with MT)
There is a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state where it is easy to enter the second starting slot (for example, the second main gaming starting port B10) than the normal gaming state, and after the end of the special game execution, the specific gaming state can be made Is configured as
When the second hold occurs, it is configured not to satisfy the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to the first hold,
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving the game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side,
Effect display content control means (e.g., for example, control effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (e.g., information transmission / reception control means SM40) , Effect display control means SM20),
A fluctuation right image, which is an image object that is newly displayed triggered by the occurrence of a new first hold, and shifted and displayed upon satisfaction of the fluctuation display start condition of the first identification information, is displayed on the effect display unit Can be displayed, and a plurality of display modes including at least a normal display mode and a special display mode different from the normal display mode as a display mode of the variable right image, and a period during which a certain variable right image is displayed In the above, it is configured to be able to change the type of display mode in the certain variable right image,
In the case where there is a first hold and a first hold, which is a first hold that will satisfy the variable display start condition of the first identification information prior to the first hold, the first reserve hold During the variable display of the first identification information when satisfying the variable display start condition of the identification information about the, execute the pending read-out effect for anticipating the execution expectation of the future special game due to the certain first hold Is possible,
In the normal gaming state, a special display mode is displayed as a display mode in a first variable variable image relating to a first hold, and a pending look-ahead effect is in progress, and a new second hold is When it occurs, while maintaining the display of the special display mode, the pachinko game machine is characterized in that the execution of the reserved pre-reading effect is stopped.

M main control board, MJ game information control means MJ 10 ball landing judgment means,
MJ11-A 1st main game start opening entrance ball judgment means MJ11-B 2nd main game start entrance entrance ball judgment means, MJ11-H auxiliary game entrance ball entrance entrance judgment means MJ11-C10 1st big prize entrance entrance ball judgment Means, MJ11-C20 2nd big winning a prize entrance sphere determination means MJ20 random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ21-A first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B second main game random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ21-H assistance Game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ30 reserve control means, MJ31 reserve digestion control means MJ31 j variation start condition satisfaction determination means, MJ32 symbol reserve means MJ32-A first main game symbol reserve means, MJ32b-A first main game symbol reserve information Memory means MJ32-B second main game symbol holding means, MJ32b-B second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32-H auxiliary game pattern maintenance Means, MJ 32b-H auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MN game content determination means, MN 10 yes or no lottery means MN11-A first main game success or failure lottery means, MN11ta-A first main game success or failure lottery table MN11-B second Main game winning lottery means, MN11ta-B second main gaming winning lottery table MN11-H auxiliary game winning lottery means, MN11ta-H auxiliary gaming success lottery table MN20 special game transition determining means, MN40 symbol contents determining means MN41-A 1st main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-A 1st main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-B 2nd main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-B 2nd main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-H auxiliary game symbol determination Means, MN41ta-H Lottery table MN50 for auxiliary game symbol determination Change mode determination Stage, MN51-A 1st main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-A 1st main game variation mode determination lottery table, MN51-B 2nd main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-B 2nd main game variation mode determination lottery Table MN51-H Auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51ta-H Lottery table for auxiliary game variation mode determination MN52 Limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52ta Limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52c Limited frequency counter A
MN52c-2 limited frequency counter B, MN52b limited frequency related information temporary storage means MP game proceeding means, MP10 display control means MP11-C first and second main game symbol control means, MP11t-C first and second main game symbol Change management timer MP11-H auxiliary game symbol control means, MP11t-H auxiliary game symbol change management timer MP20-B second main game start opening electric combination opening and closing control means, MP21-B second main game start opening electric combination Object opening and closing condition determination means MP22t-B 2nd main game start port electric role opening timer, MP30 special game control means MP31 condition determination means, MP32 special game content determination means MP32ta special game content reference table, MP33 special game execution means MP33- C 1st · 2nd large winning a prize mouth electric role opening and closing control means, MP33c winning ball counter MP34 Special Technology time management means, MP34t special game timer MP40 small hit game control means, MP41t small hit game timer MP40b small hit game related information temporary storage means, MP50 specific game control means MP51 probability variation end condition determination means, MP52 time end condition judgment Means MP52c time counter, MB gaming state temporary storage means MB10-C first and second main gaming state temporary storage means, MB11b-C first and second main gaming symbol information temporary storage means MB10-H auxiliary gaming state temporary storage Means, MB11b-H auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB20b special game related information temporary storage means, MB30b specific game related information temporary storage means MT information transmission control means MT10 command transmission buffer, MH award ball payout determination means A 1st main Game peripherals, A10 1st main game start opening A11s 1st main game start slot entrance detection device, A20 1st main game symbol display A21g 1st main game symbol display, A21h 1st main game symbol hold display B 2nd main game peripheral, B10 2nd main game Start opening B11s second main game start opening entrance detection device, B11 d second main game start opening electric role B20 second main game symbol display device, B21 g second main game symbol display portion B21 h second main game symbol hold display portion , C 1st · 2nd main game common peripheral equipment C10 1st winning opening, C11s 1st winning opening winning detection device C11d 1st winning opening electric winning combination, C20 2nd winning opening C21s 2nd winning opening Winning detection device, C21 d 2nd big winning opening electric role H auxiliary gaming peripheral equipment, H10 auxiliary gaming start opening H11s auxiliary gaming start opening entrance detection device, H20 auxiliary gaming symbol display device H21 g auxiliary gaming symbol display unit, H2 1h Auxiliary game symbol hold display section S Sub control board, SM effect display control means (sub main control board)
SM10 Display Information Receiving Means, SM11b Main Side Information Temporary Storage Means SM20 Effect Display Control Means, SM21 Decorative Symbol Display Control Means SM21n Dressing Display Content Determination Means, SM21ta Drawing Variation Content Determination Lottery Table SM21b Dressing Related Information Temporary Storage Means , SM21t drawing fluctuation time management timer SM22 drawing holding information display control means, SM22b drawing holding information temporary storage means SM26 holding pre-reading effect execution control means, SM26 k holding pre-reading effect execution possibility judging means SM26 b pre-reading related information temporary storage means, SM23 Background effect display control means SM23n Background effect display content determination means, SM23b Background effect related information temporary storage means SM23c Awake stage stay counter, SM23c-2 Devil stage stay counter SM24 Notice effect display control means, SM24n Notification effect display content determination unit SM24b notice production related information temporary storage unit, SM25 reach effect display control unit SM25n reach effect display content determination unit, SM25b reach effect related information temporary storage unit SM40 information transmission / reception control unit SS effect display unit (sub sub control unit , SS10 Sub information transmission / reception control means SS20 Image display control means, SS21 b Image display related information temporary storage means SG Effect display device, SG10 Display area SG11 Decorative symbol display area, SG12 1st hold display section SG13 2nd hold display section KH award Ball dispensing control board KE winning ball dispensing device

Claims (1)

The starting opening where the game ball can enter, and
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information;
A main gaming unit that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit capable of displaying an effect;
And an auxiliary game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit;
The main game club is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on entry into the starting opening;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired random number until the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied when the random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, and for holding to occur;
If the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, a yes / no decision is performed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information is changed in the identification information display unit based on the result of the yes / no decision Identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the identification information after the display;
Special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group;
Game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit to the secondary gaming unit side,
The secondary gaming unit is
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game unit side;
The effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
It is possible to display a fluctuation right image which is an image object that is newly displayed in response to the occurrence of a new hold and shifted and displayed in response to satisfaction of the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information on the effect display unit There are a plurality of display modes as the display mode of the variable right image, and the type of the display mode in the certain variable right image can be changed during the period when the certain variable right image is displayed. ,
In the case where there is a pre-hold that will satisfy the variable display start condition of the identification information prior to a certain hold and the certain hold, the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the pre-held reserve is satisfied During the variable display of the identification information at the time of the event, it is possible to carry out a pre-reading effect for announcing the expected degree of future special game execution due to the certain hold,
The expectation of changing the type of the display mode in the variable right image corresponding to the certain hold is the pre-reading effect in the variable display of the identification information when the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the pre-hold is satisfied It is configured to be different depending on the execution content of the presence / absence of execution and / or the pre-reading effect,
When the pre-reading effect due to the certain holding is being executed, the execution frequency of the operation effect whose operation expectation of the special game is suggested by the operation of the operating device of the player is the fluctuation of the identification information regarding the certain holding The variation display of the identification information when the display start condition is satisfied is configured to be higher than the variation display of the identification information when the change display start condition of the identification information related to the preemptive suspension is satisfied,
It has a plurality of types of effect modes as the operation effect, and is configured to have different expectations for the execution of special games depending on which type of effect mode is executed as the operation effect.
As a display mode of background display displayed in the effect display unit, at least a display mode A and a display mode B having a higher expectation of execution of a special game than the display mode A,
In the display mode A, the background display is displayed in the display mode A for the variable right image corresponding to the suspension not satisfying the variable display start condition of the identification information displayed when the background display is displayed in the display mode B than the variation right image corresponding to the hold that does not meet the varying display start condition identification information that is displayed when it is being configured probability that the type of display mode is changed is increased,
When changing the type of display mode in a certain change right image, the display change effect which is an effect of suggesting or notifying that the kind of display mode in the certain change right image is to be changed is executed, The type of display mode in the variable right image can be changed.
About the fluctuation display of the identification information performed corresponding to having satisfied the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information under the situation where the number of reservations when the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied is the first holding number The fluctuation display time is configured to be the fluctuation display time A,
In a situation where the number of reservations when the variable information display start condition of the identification information is satisfied is the second number of reservations less than the first number of reservations, in response to satisfying the condition of the variable information display start of the identification information The fluctuation display time for fluctuation display of identification information to be performed is configured to be the fluctuation display time B which is longer than the fluctuation display time A,
Under the condition that the number of reservations when the variable information display start condition of the identification information is satisfied is the first number of reservations, the variable display time A performed corresponding to satisfying the condition of the variable image display start of the identification information During the variable display of the identification information, it is possible to execute a display change effect of a certain type of display mode for the variable right image displayed corresponding to the remaining hold,
Under the condition that the number of reservations when the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied is the second number of reservations, the variation display time B performed in response to satisfying the condition of the variation display start of the identification information During the variable display of the identification information, even if a new hold occurs when the remaining variable display time of the variable display of the identification information is equal to or longer than the variable display time A, it is displayed corresponding to the new hold Although the display change effect of the certain type of display mode is not executed for the variable right image, the variable right image displayed in response to the new hold triggered by satisfying the next variable display start condition of the identification information A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to change the type of display mode in .

Images